7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 1/239
3900 Series Base Station
V100R009C00
Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06
Date 2014-03-26
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 2/239
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 3/239
About This Document
Overview
This document describes the principles for configuring hardware in 3900 series base stations.
Based on specific configuration requirements in this document, the quantities of components to
be configured in a base station can be calculated and planned.
The exteriors of components and cables in this document are for reference only. The actual
exteriors may be different.
Product Version
Product Name Product Version
BTS3900 V100R008C00 and later. The mapping base
station versions are:GBTS: V100R015C00 and later,
V300R015C00 and later
eGBTS: V100R015C00 and later
NodeB: V200R015C00 and later
eNodeB: V100R006C00 and later
BTS3900A
BTS3900L
BTS3900AL
DBS3900
BTS3900C
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Technical support engineers
l System engineers
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) About This Document
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 4/239
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global).................................................1
2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).............................4
3 Overview.........................................................................................................................................6
4 Version Difference........................................................................................................................9
4.1 Cabinet Configurations.................................................................................................................................................10
4.1.1 BTS3900 Configuration............................................................................................................................................10
4.1.2 BTS3900A Configuration..........................................................................................................................................14
4.1.3 BTS3900L Configuration..........................................................................................................................................22
4.1.4 BTS3900AL Configuration.......................................................................................................................................25
4.1.5 DBS3900 Configurations..........................................................................................................................................28
4.1.6 BTS3900C Configuration..........................................................................................................................................29
4.1.7 Cabinet Upgrade Configuration.................................................................................................................................30
4.2 BBU Configuration.......................................................................................................................................................37
4.2.1 BBU Case Configuration...........................................................................................................................................38
4.2.2 BBU Board Configuration.........................................................................................................................................40
4.2.3 CPRI Networking Configurations.............................................................................................................................59
4.3 RF Module Configuration............................................................................................................................................60
1 RF Module Configurations.................................................................................................... 0
2 RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)........................................................................ 03 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)...................................................................... 0
4 RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)........................................................................ 0
5 RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)...................................................................... 0
6 RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)...................................................................... 0
7 RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz)...................................................................... 0
8 RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS)............................................................................... 0
9 RF Modules Working at Band 12 (700 MHz)...................................................................... 0
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) Contents
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 5/239
10 RF Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz)..................................................................... 0
11 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)..................................................................... 0
12 RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz)..................................................................... 0
4.3.1 AAU Configuration...................................................................................................................................................74
4.3.2 Power Module............................................................................................................................................................84
4.3.3 RET Module Configurations...................................................................................................................................101
4.3.4 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration.....................................................................................102
4.3.5 Hardware License Configuration.............................................................................................................................150
4.4 Configurations for a Lampsite Base Station...............................................................................................................165
4.4.1 BBU Configurations in a Lampsite Base Station....................................................................................................165
4.4.2 Basic RHUB Configuration Principles....................................................................................................................166
4.4.3 Basic pRRU Configurations....................................................................................................................................168
4.5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion.......................................................................................................173
4.5.1 Typical Configurations............................................................................................................................................174
4.5.2 Capacity Expansion Principles................................................................................................................................234
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) Contents
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 6/239
1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration
Principles (Global)
This chapter describes changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principle (Global).
06 (2014-03-26)
This is the sixth official release.
Compared with Issue 05 (2014-02-28), the content is adjusted in this issue.
05 (2014-02-28)
This is the fifth official release.
Compared with Issue 04 (2014-01-20), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 4.4.2 Basic RHUB Configuration Principles.
l 4.4.3 Basic pRRU Configurations.
l 4.4.1 BBU Configurations in a Lampsite Base Station.
Compared with Issue 04 (2014-01-20), this issue does not exclude any topics.
04 (2014-01-20)This is the fourth official release.
Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue includes the following new topics:
l AAU3902 Configuration.
l 4.2.3 CPRI Networking Configurations.
l GU Co-BBP.
l Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P
Scenarios.
Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue includes the following changes.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 7/239
Topic Change Description
4.1 Cabinet Configurations and its child
topics
Added description of the BBU3910 to the
configuration list.
UMTS BBU Board Configurations Added configuration principles for the
UBBP.
License Configuration of Multimode Base
Stations
Added the configuration of the multimode co-
BBP license.
Compared with Issue 03 (2013-11-08), this issue does not exclude any topics.
03 (2013-11-08)
This is the thir d commercial release.
Compared with Issue 02 (2013-08-01), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic Change Description
BTS3900 Configuration List Added the BTS3900 (Ver.D)+IMB06
configuration.
BTS3900L Configuration List Added the BTS3900L (Ver.D)+IMB06
configuration.
02 (2013-08-01)
This is the second commercial release.
Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26), this issue does not include any new information or
exclude any information.
Compared with Issue 01 (2013-06-26), this issue includes the following changes:
Topic Change Description
4.2.2 BBU Board Configuration and its
child topics
Added models.
01 (2013-06-26)
This is the first commercial release.
Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20), this issue does not include any new information.
Compared with Draft A (2013-05-20), this issue includes the following changes.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 8/239
Topic Change Description
4.3 RF Module Configuration and its child
topics
Added the description of the AAU.
4.1 Cabinet Configurations and its child
topics
Added the cabinet configuration list.
Draft A (20.05.13)
This is a draft.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 1 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 9/239
2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principle (Global)
This document describes the configuration principles for single- and multi-mode 3900 series
base stations.
Introduction to 3900 Series Base Stations
The 3900 series base stations, which mainly comprises the baseband unit (BBU) and RF
modules, use the state-of-the-art multimode technology. A uniform design is applied to various
product forms and different installation scenarios. This significantly reduces operators' network
construction and operating costs in site acquisition, capacity expansion, and environmental
protection.The 3900 series base stations provide various solutions for evolution from GSM to
UMTS and then to LTE.
l The BBU supports multimode applications.
Boards working in different modes can be configured in a BBU so that any two or three
among GSM, UMTS, and LTE can share the BBU. In separate-MPT scenarios, one BBU
supports two modes, and two BBUs support triple modes. In co-MPT scenarios, one BBU
supports triple modes.
l RRUs and RFUs support multimode and multi-band applications.
– With the SDR technology, RF modules support any two or all triple modes among GSM,
UMTS and LTE by using different software configurations to meet operators'
requirements. RF modules of different modes can be deployed at one base station.Therefore, a base station can work in a single mode or any two or all triple modes among
GSM, UMTS and LTE.
– RF modules working in different frequency bands can also be used together.
– Blade RRUs include RRU3936/RRU3938/RRU3939, RRU3824/RRU3826/RRU3838/
RRU3832/RRU3839, and RRU3268/RRU3260.
– High-power RFUs are as follows: MRFUd/MRFUe/WRFUd/WRFUe/CRFUd used
together with the BTS3900 (Ver.C/Ver.D) cabinet.
– High-power RRUs are as follows: RRU3829/RRU3929/RRU3942/RRU3841/
RRU3961/RRU3832/RRU3839/RRU3939 that are used together with the DCDU-11B/
DCDU-12B. All other RRUs are low-power RRUs. In addition, the 2100 MHz
AAU3910 and AWS AAU3910 are also high-power RF modules.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global)
2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration
Principle (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 10/239
NOTE
The BBU in this document includes the BBU3900 and BBU3910.
Description
The following table describes the meanings of some symbols and phrases in the document.
Table 2-1 Symbol meanings
Symbol Description
& It is used between different modes in a separate-MPT base station.For example,
GSM&UMTS indicates a separate-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station,
which can be shortened to GU.
* It is used between different modes in a co-MPT base station. For example,
GSM*UMTS indicates a co-MPT GSM/UMTS dual-mode base station, whichcan be shortened to G*U.
+ It is used between different modes for the two BBUs in a separate-MPT base
station.For example, GSM&UMTS+LTE indicates a separate-MPT GSM/
UMTS/LTE triple-mode base station, which can be shortened to GU+L.
[] the modes contained in [] share the same main control board. For example, GSM
[UMTS*LTE] can be shortened to G[U*L].
_ The mode following the underscore next to UMPT or UBBP is the actual mode
in which the UMPT or UBBP is working. For example, UMPT_GUL is a UMPT
working in GUL mode and UBBP_UL is a UBBP working in UL mode.
GU SDR GSM and UMTS share the same RF modules.
GL SDR GSM and LTE share the same RF modules.
UL SDR UMTS and LTE share the same RF modules.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global)
2 Changes in 3900 Series Base Station Configuration
Principle (Global)
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 11/239
3 Overview
SRAN9.0The single-mode versions for SRAN9.0 are GBSS16.0, RAN16.0, and eRAN7.0. Compared
with SRAN8.0, SRAN9.0 includes the following changes:
l Added the 1.8 A AAU3902 in GL mode.
l Added the UBBP and BBU3910. A BBU3910 can be installed in the following cabinets:
BTS3900 (Ver.D), BTS3900L (Ver.D), BTS3900A (Ver.D), APM30H (Ver.D), TMC11H
(Ver.D), IMB03, OMB (Ver.C) (applies to DBS3900 and BTS3900C (Ver.C)), and
BTS3900AL (Ver.A).
l Added the Cloud BB solution.
l
Added the multimode baseband license.l Added configurations for the Lampsite solution.
l Added the ODM and OFD.
SRAN8.1
The single-mode versions for SRAN8.1 are GBSS15.1, RAN15.1, and eRAN6.1. Compared
with SRAN8.0, SRAN8.1 includes the following changes:
l Added the following RF modules: EGSM, PGSM, and RRU3938 (1800 MHz)
l Added the RRU3268 800 MHz for eRAN6.1.
l Added the AAU3902 (1.8 A) working in the LTE only mode.
l Added the GULT quadruple mode.
SRAN8.0
The single-mode versions for SRAN8.0 are GBSS15.0, RAN15.0, and eRAN6.0. Compared
with SRAN7.0, SRAN8.0 includes the following changes:
l Added the following new hardware: UBRIb, UMPTb1, LBBPd3, , and UTRPa.
l Added the AAU3910, which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2600
MHz, or AWS.
l Added the AAU3902 (2100 MHz).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 3 Overview
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 12/239
l Added the RRU3926 in GL mode.
l Specified specifications of HSPA user number supported by a WBBP.
l Added the GU/GL/UL/GUL co-MPT configurations.
l
Added the following RF modules: RRU3260 (2600 MHz), RRU3268 (2600 MHz),RRU3939 (1800 MHz), and RRU3936 (850 MHz and 1900 MHz).
l Added the AAU3910, which can serve as an active unit of 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, 2600
MHz, or AWS in SRAN8.0.
l Added the RRU3808 of AWS working in UL mode.
SRAN7.0
The single-mode versions for SRAN7.0 are GBSS14.0, RAN14.0, and eRAN3.0. Compared
with SRAN6.0, SRAN7.0 includes the following changes:
lAdded the following hardware: the UTRPc (transmission extension board), BBUinterconnection port, UTRPa, UCIU (interconnection board), UMPTa1 (UMTS main
control board), WBBPf (UMTS baseband processing board), LBBPd (LTE baseband
processing board), UMPTa2 (LTE main control board), LRFUe (2600 MHz), MRFUe
(E900M), RRU3841 (AWS), RRU3942 (850 MHz), CRFUd (AWS), and UMPTb1 (only
for UMTS).
l Added the following LTE hardware licenses: Resource Block License, BB Receive
Channel License, BB Transmit Channel, RF Transmit Channel, and RF Receive Channel.
l Added UMTS NodeB Signaling Capacity License.
l Added the configuration scenarios where SDR RF modules are connected by means of
BBU interconnection.
l Added configurations for GUL modes, such as GSM&UMTS+LTE (GSM), GSM<E
+UMTS (GSM), GSM&UMTS+UMTS<E, GSM&UMTS+UMTS<E (GSM).
NOTE
In triple-mode configurations, LTE (GSM) or UMTS (GSM) indicates that LTE or UMTS uses one BBU
and shares SDR RF modules with GSM in the other BBU. Therefore, the SDR RF modules must be
connected across BBUs in a star topology to support GL or GU. GSM is contained in brackets because a
GTMU board is not configured in the BBU which is only used by LTE or UMTS.
l Added configurations for GUL triple-mode co-transmission
l Added configurations for GUL triple-mode common clock.
l Added the RRU3942 of 1900 MHz in UL mode.
l
l The BTS3900 (Ver.D) AC cabinet can be stacked on an IMS06 which houses transmission
equipment or 92 Ah storage batteries.
eRAN2.2
eRAN2.2 is an LTE only version. Compared with eRAN2.1, eRAN2.2 includes the following
changes:
l Added the following features in eRAN2.2: UL 2x4 MU-MIMO and DL 4x4 MIMO.
l Added dual-carrier configurations.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 3 Overview
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 13/239
SRAN6.0
The single-mode versions for SRAN6.0 are GBSS13.0, RAN13.0, and eRAN2.1. Compared
with SRAN5.0, SRAN6.0 includes the following changes:
l Added the following hardware: RF modules of Band 13 (700 MHz), RF modules of Band
20 (800 MHz), MRFU V2 of Band 5 (850 MHz), MRFUd of P900M/E900M, MRFUd of
Band 2 (1800 MHz), RRU3929 of E900M, RRU3928 of 900 MHz, RRU3929 of 1800
MHz, RRU3928 of 1800 MHz, LRFUe of 800 MHz, RRU3240 of 2600 MHz, RRU3942
of 1900 MHz, RRU3926 of 900 MHz PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz EGSM, RRU3929 of
P900M, WRFUe of 2100 MHz, RRU3936 of 900 MHz PGSM/1800 MHz/900 MHz
EGSM, WRFUa of 2100 MHz (100 W), and RRU3221 of 2600 MHz, enhanced WRFU of
2100 MHz (80 W), RRU3839 of 2100 MHz, RRU3832 of AWS, RRU3938 of EGSM/
PGSM/1800 MHz, enhanced MRFUd, and RRU3939 of 1800 MHz.
l Added the maximum configuration of six UMTS baseband processing boards.
lAdded a new cabinet, which is required by the MRFUd, WRFUd, LRFUe, and MRFUe.The new cabinet supports the GUL triple modes, including the GSM&UMTS+LTE and
GSM<E+UMTS modes.
l Added the following SRAN6.0 dual-mode features: GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum
Sharing and 2.0 MHz Central Frequency Point Separation between GSM and UMTS Mode.
l Added the following RAN13.0 features: E-DPCCH Boosting, DC-HSDPA+MIMO, Dual-
threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation, NodeB Internal Firewall,
Anti-interference Scheduling for HSUPA, Traffic-based Activation and Deactivation of
the Supplementary Carrier in Multi-carrier, Multi-carrier Switch off Based on QoS,
Intelligent Power Management, Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs
in One Cell, CQI Adjustment, and MIMO prime.
l Added the following eRAN2.1 features: TTI Bundling, LoCation Services (LCS), and Cell
Outage Detection and Compensation.
l Added the GSM high power 80 W license.
l Added the BTS3900(AC) Ver.D and BTS3900L(AC) Ver.D cabinets for 220 V AC
scenarios.
SRAN 5.0
The single-mode versions for SRAN5.0 are GBSS12.0, RAN12.0, and eRAN2.0. Compared
with SRAN3.0, SRAN5.0 includes the following changes:
l Added the following hardware: WBBPd (UMTS baseband board), UTRPb4 (GSM
transmission board), RRU3806 of 2100 MHz (80 W), RRU3808 of AWS, RRU3824 of
2100 MHz, RRU3826 of 2100 MHz, RRU3838 of 2100 MHz, RRU3832 of 2100 MHz,
WRFUd of 2100 MHz, RRU3828 of 2100 MHz, and RRU3829 of 2100 MHz.
l Added the following SRAN5.0 dual-mode features: Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing
and Bandwidth Sharing of MBTS in Multi-mode Co-Transmission.
l Added the following RAN12.0 features: Interference Cancellation (IC), Frequency Domain
Equalization (FDE), UL L2 Enhanced, DL 64QAM+MIMO, UL 16QAM, DC-HSDPA,
and Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.
l Added the GSM high power 60 W license.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 3 Overview
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 14/239
4 Version Difference
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the principles for configuringDBS3900BTS3900C.
4.1 Cabinet Configurations
4.2 BBU Configuration
4.3 RF Module Configuration
4.4 Configurations for a Lampsite Base Station
4.5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 15/239
4.1 Cabinet Configurations
3900 series base stations adopt a module design. A macro base station consists of the cabinet,
BBU, and RF modules. Its minimum configuration consists of a cabinet and the minimum
configuration of baseband processing boards, main control and transmission boards, and RF
modules. A distributed base station consists of baseband processing boards and RF modules. Its
minimum configuration consists of the minimum configuration of baseband processing boards,
main control and transmission boards, and RF modules. The baseband processing boards, RF
modules, and transmission interface boards support smooth capacity expansion by adding related
boards or licenses.
4.1.1 BTS3900 Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900 site.
BTS3900 configuration principles
The following table lists the BTS3900 configuration principles.
Table 4-1 BTS3900 configuration principles
Single/Dual/ Triple-ModeBase Station
MaximumNumber ofCabinets
MaximumNumber ofBBUs
MaximumNumber of RFModules
Description
Single- or dual-mode base
station
2 1 l If only RFUsare
configured, a
maximum of
12 RFUs are
supported.
l If RFUs and
RRUs are
configured, a
maximum of
12 RFUs and
6 RRUs aresupported.
-
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 16/239
Single/Dual/ Triple-ModeBase Station
MaximumNumber ofCabinets
MaximumNumber ofBBUs
MaximumNumber of RFModules
Description
Separate-MPTtriple-mode
base station
2 2 If only RFUs areconfigured, a
maximum of 12
RFUs are
supported.
If RFUs and
RRUs are
configured:
l A Ver.B or
Ver.C
cabinet
supports amaximum of
12 RFUs and
6 RRUs. The
DCDU
supplying
power to
RRUs must
be installed
on a wall
outside the
cabinet.
l A site that
uses Ver.D
cabinets
supports a
maximum of
12 RFUs, 6
high-power
RRUs, and 3
low-power
RRUs. The
DCDU
supplying
power to
RRUs can be
installed in
the
BTS3900
cabinet.
For high-power RRUs, see2
Changes in
3900 Series
Base Station
Configuration
Principle
(Global).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 17/239
Single/Dual/ Triple-ModeBase Station
MaximumNumber ofCabinets
MaximumNumber ofBBUs
MaximumNumber of RFModules
Description
Co-MPT triple-mode base
station
2 1 If only RFUs areconfigured, a
maximum of 12
RFUs are
supported.
If RFUs and
RRUs are
configured, a
maximum of 12
RFUs and 6
RRUs are
supported.
-
NOTE
l A single Ver.B or Ver.C AC cabinet can house a maximum of one BBU. A single Ver.D cabinet can
house a maximum of two BBUs.
l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used.
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be
used.
l The BTS3900 (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) AC cabinet and +24 V DC BTS3900 (Ver.B) cabinet can neither be
configured as a separate-MPT triple-mode base station nor be configured with RFUs and RRUs
together. The Ver.D AC cabinet can be configured with a maximum of 6 RFUs and 9 RRUs.
BTS3900 Configuration List
The following table lists BTS3900 cabinets and their internal devices.
Table 4-2 Configuration list
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2B48RACK00 BTS3900 Cabinet (DC
-48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900 indoor
macro cabinet, which houses
BBUs and RFUs and applies
to scenarios with AC backup
power.
WD2B48RACK03 BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.C,
DC -48V)
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 18/239
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2P048CAB10 BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.D,
DC -48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900 indoor
macro base station, which
houses BBUs and RFUs andapplies to the 220 V AC
scenarios with backup power
and 110 V AC scenarios with
or without backup power. One
piece of DC cabinet can be
configured in 220 V AC
scenarios without backup
power when the site needs to
be configured with 7 to 11
RFUs.
WD2PACRACK00 BTS3900 Cabinet (AC220V/110V)
220 V AC or 110 V AC indoor macro cabinet for housing the
power module, BBUs, and
RFUsWD2BACRACK01 BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.C,
AC 220V/110V)
WD2P220CAB00 BTS3900 Cabinet (Ver.D,
220VAC)
220 V AC indoor macro
cabinet, consisting of a
BTS3900 cabinet and an
IMS06 stacked together. The
IMS06 can house a 5 U AC
power device. It is supported
from SRAN6.0 onwards.In 220 V AC scenarios
without backup power, one
piece is configured by default.
When two cabinets need to be
configured, the site can be
configured with one AC
cabinet and one DC cabinet.
WD2M048BBU01 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing
baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUc. The
UPEUc can provide 360 W
power.
WD2M3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing
baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUd and
FANd. The UPEUd can
provide 650 W power.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 19/239
NOTE
When the BTS3900 is stacked on two IMS06s, an EPU05A and a group of battaries (92 Ah) or an EPU05A
and two transmission devices can be installed.
4.1.2 BTS3900A ConfigurationThis section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900A site.
BTS3900A configuration principles
The following table lists the BTS3900A configuration principles.
Table 4-3 BTS3900A configuration principles
Single/
Dual/ Triple-ModeBaseStation
Maximum
Number ofCabinets
Maxim
umNumber ofBBUs
Maximum
Number of RFModules
Remarks
Single- or
dual-mode
base station
l A BTS3900A
site can uses
Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets
supports a
maximum of
two groups of
APM30H
+RFC.
l A BTS3900A
site that uses
Ver.D cabinets
supports a
maximum of
one APM30H
and two RFCs.
1 l If only RFUs
need to be
configured, a
maximum of 12
RFUs are
supported.
l If RFUs and
RRUs need to be
configured:
A BTS3900A site
that uses Ver.B or
Ver.C cabinets
supports a
maximum of 6
RFUs and 6
RRUs. A
BTS3900A site
that uses Ver.D
cabinets support
a maximum of 6
RFUs, 6 high-
power RRUs, and
3 low-power
RRUs.
For high-power
RRUs, see2
Changes in 3900
Series Base Station
Configuration
Principle (Global).
Separate-
MPT triple-
mode basestation
2
Co-MPT
triple-mode
base station
1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 20/239
NOTE
l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, LRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must
be used.
l When RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must
be used.
BTS3900A Configuration List
The following table lists the BTS3900A cabinets and their internal devices.
Table 4-4 Configuration list
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2P022APM03 Advanced Power Module for
BTS3900A (APM30, AC220V)
Outdoor cabinet (APM30)
for a BTS3900A site suppliedwith 220 V AC power
By default, this item contains
two PSUs (AC/DC). When
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 1600 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2P022APM04 Advanced Power Module for
BTS3900A (APM30, AC
220V)
WD2P022APM05 Advanced Power Module for
BTS3900A (APM30, AC
220V)
Outdoor cabinet (APM30)
for a BTS3900A site supplied
with 220 V AC power, with a
heat exchanger
By default, this item contains
two PSUs (AC/DC). When
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 1600 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
The cabinet of the 05/06 type
is used in cold areas with a
temperature below -20°C.
WD2P022APM06 Advanced Power Module for
BTS3900A (APM30, AC
220V)
WD2P011APM03 Advanced Power Module for BTS3900A (APM30, AC
110V)
Outdoor cabinet (APM30)for a BTS3900A site supplied
with 110 V AC power
By default, this item contains
two PSUs (AC/DC). When
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 1600 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2B048APM03 Advanced Power Module for
BTS3900A (APM30, -48V)
Outdoor cabinet (APM30)
for a BTS3900A site supplied
with -48 V DC power
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 21/239
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2B048APM04 Advanced Power Module for
BTS3900A (APM30, DC
-48V)
WD2B048APM07 Advanced Power Module for
BTS3900A (APM30, DC
-48V)
Outdoor cabinet (APM30)
with heating film, used for a
BTS3900A site supplied with
-48 V DC power
For a cabinet with heating
film, the customer needs to
provide independent power
supply for the heating film.
WD2B048APM06 Advanced Power Module for
BTS3900A (APM30, DC
-48V)
WD2B226RFU03 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet BTS3900A cabinet, used for
housing RFUsWD2B226RFU04 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet
WD2B116RFU03 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet Outdoor macro cabinet
housing RFUs for a
BTS3900A site supplied with
110 V AC power
WD2M048BBU01 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing
baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUc. The
UPEUc can provide 360 W
power.
WD2M3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing
baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUd and
FANd. The UPEUd can
provide 650 W power.
WD2P022CAB00 BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C,
AC 220V)
220 V BTS3900A outdoor
cabinet for stacked
installation. It contains an
APM30 and an RFC.
In a newly deployed site, thisitem needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are
required. In 220 V AC
scenarios, a site supports a
maximum of two outdoor
macro cabinets. The two
cabinets include one APM30
and one RFC, which support
triple modes.
By default, this item contains
two PSUs (AC/DC). When
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 22/239
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2P022CAB01 BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C,
AC 220V)
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 2900 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
The cabinet of the 01 type is
used in cold areas with a
temperature below -20°C.
WD2P011CAB00 BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C,
AC 110V)
110 V BTS3900A outdoor
cabinet for stacked
installation. It contains an
APM30 and an RFC.
In a newly deployed site, this
item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are
required.
In 110 V AC scenarios, a site
supports a maximum of two
outdoor macro cabinets. The
two cabinets include one
APM30 and one RFC, which
support triple modes.
By default, this item containstwo PSUs (AC/DC). When
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 2900 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2P048CAB00 BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C,
DC -48V)
-48 V BTS3900A outdoor
cabinet for stacked
installation. It contains an
APM30 and an RFC.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 23/239
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2P048CAB01 BTS3900A Cabinet (Ver.C,
DC -48V)
In a newly deployed site, this
item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are
required. In -48 V DC
scenarios, a site supports a
maximum of two outdoor
macro cabinets. The two
cabinets include one APM30
and one RFC, which support
triple modes.
The cabinet of the 01 type is
used in cold areas with a
temperature below -20°C.
WD2B226RFU05 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet
(Ver.C)
Outdoor macro cabinet
housing RFUs for a
BTS3900A site
When high-power RFUs are
used, this item must be
configured. This item is
configured when an RFU
cabinet is required. In a
newly deployed site, this item
needs to be configured if high-power RRUs are
required.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 24/239
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2P022CAB21 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D,
220V AC)
Outdoor cabinets for stacked
installation at a BTS3900A
site supplied with 220V DC power. This package
contains an APM30 and an
RFC.
When high-power RFUs are
used, this item must be
configured.
In a newly deployed site, this
item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are
required. In 220 V AC
scenarios, a site supports amaximum of two outdoor
macro cabinets. The two
cabinets include one APM30
and one RFC, which support
triple modes.
By default, this item contains
two PSUs (AC/DC). When
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 2900 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 25/239
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2P022CAB22 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D,
220V AC)
Outdoor cabinets for stacked
installation at a BTS3900A
site supplied with 110V DC power. This package
contains an APM30 and an
RFC.
When high-power RFUs are
used, this item must be
configured.
In a newly deployed site, this
item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are
required.
In 110 V AC scenarios, a sitesupports a maximum of two
outdoor macro cabinets. The
two cabinets include one
APM30 and one RFC, which
support triple modes.
By default, this item contains
two PSUs (AC/DC). When
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 2900 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 26/239
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2P011CAB23 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D,
110V AC)
Outdoor cabinets for stacked
installation at a BTS3900A
site supplied with 110V DC power. This package
contains an APM30 and an
RFC.
When high-power RFUs are
used, this item must be
configured.
In a newly deployed site, this
item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are
required.
In 110 V AC scenarios, a sitesupports a maximum of two
outdoor macro cabinets. The
two cabinets include one
APM30 and one RFC, which
support triple modes.
By default, this item contains
two PSUs (AC/DC). When
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 2900 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
WD2P048CAB24 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D,
-48V DC)
Outdoor cabinets for stacked
installation at a BTS3900A
site supplied with -48 V DC
power. This package
contains an APM30 and an
RFC.
When high-power RFUs are
used, this item must be
configured.
In a newly deployed site, thisitem needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are
required. In -48 V DC
scenarios, a site supports a
maximum of two outdoor
macro cabinets. The two
cabinets include one APM30
and one RFC, which support
triple modes.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 27/239
Model Description Configuration Principle
WD2P048CAB25 BTS3900A Cabinet(Ver.D,
-48V DC)
When high-power RFUs are
used, this item must be
configured.In a newly deployed site, this
item needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are
required. In -48 V DC
scenarios, a site supports a
maximum of two outdoor
macro cabinets. The two
cabinets include one APM30
and one RFC, which support
triple modes.
WD2B226RFU11 BTS3900A RFU Cabinet(Ver.D, -48V DC)
Outdoor macro cabinethousing RFUs for a
BTS3900A site
When high-power RFUs are
used, this item must be
configured. This item is
configured when an RFU
cabinet is required. In a
newly deployed site, this item
needs to be configured if
high-power RRUs are
required.
4.1.3 BTS3900L Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900L site.
BTS3900L configuration principles
The following table lists the BTS3900L configuration principles.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 28/239
Table 4-5 BTS3900L configuration principles
Single/Dual/ Triple-ModeBase Station
MaximumNumberof
Cabinets
MaximumNumber
of BBUs
Maximum Numberof RF Modules
Description
Single- or
dual-mode
base station
1 1 l If only RFUs are
configured, a
maximum of 12
RFUs are
supported.
l If RFUs and RRUs
are configured, a
maximum of 12
RFUs and 6 RRUs
are supported.
-
Separate-MPT
triple-mode
base station
1 2 l If only RFUs are
configured, a
maximum of 12
RFUs are
supported.
l If RFUs and RRUs
need to be
configured:
A BTS3900L site
that uses Ver.B or
Ver.C cabinets
supports a
maximum of 12
RFUs and 6 RRUs.
A BTS3900L site
that uses Ver.D
cabinets supports a
maximum of 12
RFUs, 6 high-
power RRUs, and 3
low-power RRUs.
For high-power RRUs,
see2 Changes in 3900
Series Base Station
Configuration
Principle (Global).
Co-MPT
triple-mode
base station
1 1 l If only RFUs are
configured, a
maximum of 12
RFUs are
supported.
l If RFUs and RRUs
are configured, a
maximum of 12
RFUs and 6 RRUs
are supported.
-
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 29/239
NOTE
l If the MRFUd, WRFUd, WRFUe, or MRFUe is configured, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be used.
l If RFUs and RRUs are configured and the RRUs are of high power, a Ver.C or Ver.D cabinet must be
used.
BTS3900L Configuration List
The following table lists BTS3900L cabinets and their internal devices.
Table 4-6 Configuration list
Model Counter Description Function
WD2B48RACK01 BTS3900L Cabinet (DC -48V) -48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.B)
indoor macro cabinet, which
houses BBUs and RFUs and
applies to the 220 V AC or 110 V AC scenarios with or
without backup power.
WD2B48RACK04 BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.C, DC
-48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900L (Ver.C)
indoor macro cabinet, which
houses BBUs and RFUs and
applies to the 220 V AC or
110 V AC scenarios with or
without backup power.
WD2P048CABL1 BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.D, DC
-48V)
-48 V DC BTS3900L
(Ver.D) indoor macrocabinet, which houses BBUs
and RFUs and applies to the
220 V AC scenarios with
backup power and 110 V AC
scenarios with or without
backup power.
WD2P220CAB01 BTS3900L Cabinet (Ver.D,
220VAC)
220 V AC BTS3900L
(Ver.D) indoor macro base
station, which consists of a
BTS3900L cabinet stacked
on an IMS06. It houses the
EPU05A, BBUs, and RFUs.
It is supported from
SRAN6.0 onwards.
WD2M048BBU01 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing
baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUc. The
UPEUc can provide 360 W
power.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 30/239
Model Counter Description Function
WD2M3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing
baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUd andFANd. The UPEUd can
provide 650 W power.
4.1.4 BTS3900AL Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900AL site.
BTS3900AL configuration principles
The following table lists the BTS3900AL configuration principles.
Table 4-7 BTS3900AL configuration principles
Single/ Dual/ Triple-ModeBase
Station
MaximumNumberofCabinet
s
MaximumNumber ofBBUs
Maximum Number ofRF Modules
Description
Single- or
dual-mode
base station
A
maximu
m of two
BTS3900
AL
cabinets
(1
BTS3900
AL AC
cabinet+1
BTS3900AL DC
cabinet)
1 If only RFUs are
configured, a maximum
of 18 RFUs are
supported.
If RFUs and RRUs are
configured, a maximum
of 9 RFUs and 9 RRUs
are supported.
For high-power RRUs,
see2 Changes in 3900
Series Base Station
Configuration Principle
(Global).
Separate-
MPT triple-mode base
station
2 If only RFUs are
configured, a maximumof 18 RFUs are
supported.
If RFUs and RRUs are
configured, a maximum
of 9 RFUs and 12 RRUs
are supported.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 31/239
Single/ Dual/ Triple-Mode
BaseStation
MaximumNumberof
Cabinets
MaximumNumber of
BBUs
Maximum Number ofRF Modules
Description
Co-MPT
triple-mode
base station
1 If only RFUs are
configured, a maximum
of 18 RFUs are
supported.
If RFUs and RRUs are
configured, a maximum
of 9 RFUs and 9 RRUs
are supported.
NOTE
If a site is configured with two BTS3900AL cabinets. the two cabinets must be installed side by side with
the BTS3900AL DC cabinet on the right.
BTS3900AL Configuration List
The following table lists BTS3900AL cabinets and their internal devices.
Table 4-8 Configuration list
Model Counter Description Function
WD2P048BBU00 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing
baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUc. The
UPEUc can provide 360 W
power.
WD2P3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing
baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUd andFANd. The UPEUd can
provide 650 W power.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 32/239
Model Counter Description Function
WD5P0ACCAB00 BTS3900AL Cabinet (AC
220V/110V)
BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V
outdoor cabinet
In 220 V AC or 110 V ACscenarios, a site supports a
maximum of one AC outdoor
macro cabinet and one DC
outdoor macro cabinet.
By default, this item contains
two PSUs (AC/DC). When
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 2900 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
Each cabinet is configuredwith a maximum of 9 RFUs
and 2 BBUs.
WD5P0ACCAB01 BTS3900AL Cabinet (AC
220V/110V)
BTS3900AL 220 V/110 V
outdoor cabinet, used in cold
areas
In 220 V AC or 110 V AC
scenarios, a site supports a
maximum of one AC outdoor
macro cabinet and one DC
outdoor macro cabinet.By default, this item contains
two PSUs (AC/DC). When
the total power consumption
of a single cabinet is greater
than 2900 W, an additional
PSU (AC/DC) is required.
Each cabinet is configured
with a maximum of 9 RFUs
and 2 BBUs.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 33/239
Model Counter Description Function
WD5P0DCCAB00 BTS3900AL Cabinet (DC
-48V)
BTS3900AL -48 V DC
outdoor cabinet
When a site is configuredwith more than 9 RFUs, one
BTS3900AL AC cabinet and
one BTS3900AL DC cabinet
or two BTS3900AL DC
cabinets can be configured to
support a maximum of 18
RFUs. The DC cabinet is
powered by the AC cabinet.
Each cabinet is configured
with a maximum of 9 RFUs.
WD5P0DCCAB01 BTS3900AL Cabinet (DC
-48V)
BTS3900AL -48 V DC
outdoor cabinet, used in cold
areas
When a site is configured
with more than 9 RFUs, one
BTS3900AL AC cabinet and
one BTS3900AL DC cabinet
or two BTS3900AL DC
cabinets can be configured to
support a maximum of 18
RFUs. The DC cabinet is
powered by the AC cabinet.
Each cabinet is configured
with a maximum of 9 RFUs.
4.1.5 DBS3900 Configurations
The OMB cabinet is an outdoor power cabinet and provides no backup power. It is used for the
DBS3900 and cannot be configured with an APM30 series power cabinet.
OMB Configurations
The following table lists the cabinets used by the OMB and their components.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 34/239
Table 4-9 Configuration list
External Model Description Function
QWMB0OMBAC00 OMB Cabinet (Ver.C,
220/110 V AC)
This is an OMB (Ver.C)
cabinet supplied with 220 VAC single-phase or 110 V
AC dual-live-wire power.
Each cabinet supports a
maximum of six RRUs and
one BBU. Each site can be
configured with a maximum
of one cabinet.
QWMB0OMBDC00 OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, -48 V
DC)
This is an OMB (Ver.C)
cabinet supplied with -48 V
DC power. Each cabinet
supports a maximum of six
RRUs and one BBU. Each
site can be configured with a
maximum of one cabinet.
WD2MR4850G00 PSU Module (AC/DC) This is a power supply
module.
One PSU is configured when
the OMB (Ver.C) AC cabinet
uses four to six DC RRUs.
4.1.6 BTS3900C Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring the cabinets, BBUs, and RF modules at a
BTS3900C site.
BTS3900C Configuration Principles
The following table lists the BTS3900C configuration principles.
Table 4-10 BTS3900C configuration principles
CabinetConfiguration
MaximumNumber ofBBUs
RF ModuleConfiguration
Remarks
BTS3900C
(Ver.C), consisting
of an OMB
(Ver.C) and an
RRU subrack
1 Only one RRU
can be
configured.
It applies to a single- or multi-
mode base station.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 35/239
BTS3900C Configuration List
The following table lists the cabinets used by the BTS3900C and their internal devices.
Table 4-11 Configuration list
Model Description Function
QWMB0OMBAC00 OMB Cabinet (Ver.C,
220/110V AC)
OMB (Ver.C) supplied with
220 V AC single-phase or
110 V AC dual-live-wire
power
QWMB0OMBDC00 OMB Cabinet (Ver.C, -48V
DC)
OMB (Ver.C) supplied with
-48 V DC power
WD2M048BBU01 BBU Box Baseband unit for housing baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUc. The
UPEUc can provide 360 W
power.
WD2M3910BBU0 BBU3910 Box Baseband unit for housing
baseband processing units,
containing one UPEUd and
FANd. The UPEUd can
provide 650 W power.
4.1.7 Cabinet Upgrade Configuration
The cabinet upgrade solution aims to replace components in a cabinet whose version is earlier
than Ver.D with components designed for a Ver.D cabinet so that the restructured cabinet has
the same capabilities of power supply, power distribution, and heat dissipation as a Ver.D
cabinet. This solution facilitates the evolution to SingleRAN.
BTS3900The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 36/239
Table 4-12 BTS3900 cabinet upgrade packages
Model Description
Function MaximumQuant
ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B00AD
4800
BTS3900
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.A to
Ver.D,
-48VDC)
This
package is
used to
upgrade a
BTS3900
(Ver.A)
cabinet to a
BTS3900
(Ver.D)
cabinet in
-48 V DC
scenarios.
2 l Optional.
l When a BTS3900 (Ver.A)
cabinet supplied with -48 V
power is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the
cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the BTS3900 cabinet
upgrade, such as the DCDUand fans.
WD2B00BD
4800
BTS3900
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.B to
Ver.D,
-48VDC)
This
package is
used to
upgrade a
BTS3900
(Ver.B)
cabinet to a
BTS3900
(Ver.D)cabinet in
-48 V DC
scenarios.
2 l Optional.
l When a BTS3900 (Ver.B)
cabinet supplied with -48 V
power is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the
cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the BTS3900 cabinet
upgrade, such as the DCDU
and fans.
BTS3900L
The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 37/239
Table 4-13 BTS3900L cabinet upgrade packages
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2B0LBD
4800
BTS3900L
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.B to
Ver.D,
-48VDC)
This
package is
used to
upgrade a
BTS3900L
(Ver.B)
cabinet to a
BTS3900L
(Ver.D)
cabinet in-48 V DC
scenarios.
1 l Optional.
l When a BTS3900L (Ver.B)
cabinet supplied with -48 V
power is to be upgraded, one
package is configured for the
cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the BTS3900L cabinet
upgrade, such as the DCDU
and fans.
BTS3900A
The following table lists the configuration of BTS3900A cabinet upgrade packages.
The battery cabinet for the original base station also needs to be upgraded. For details about theconfiguration of battery cabinet upgrade packages, see related APM30 configuration manuals.
Table 4-14 BTS3900A (Ver.A) cabinet upgrade packages
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2B220A
2D00
APM30H
Cabinet
UpgradePackage
(Ver.A.1 to
Ver.D,
220VAC,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used toupgrade an
APM30
(Ver.A 301)
to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
220 V AC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301)
at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site
is to be upgraded, one package
is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,
such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs,
and one PMU. If more than two
PSUs are required, extra PSUs
must be quoted.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 38/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2B110A
2D00
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.A.1 to
Ver.D,
110VAC,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.A 301)
to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
110 V AC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301)
at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site
is to be upgraded, one package
is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,
such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs,
and one PMU. If more than twoPSUs are required, extra PSUs
must be quoted.
WD2BA48A
2D00
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.A.1 to
Ver.D,
-48VDC,
TMC11H,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.A 301)
to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a-48 V DC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 301)
at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site
is to be upgraded, one package
is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, and fans.
WD2B220A
2D02
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.A.2 to
Ver.D,
220VAC,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.A 302)
to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
220 V AC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302)
at a 220 V AC BTS3900A site
is to be upgraded, one package
is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials requiredduring the APM30 upgrade,
such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs,
and one PMU. If more than two
PSUs are required, extra PSUs
must be quoted.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 39/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2B110A
2D02
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.A.2 to
Ver.D,
110VAC,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.A 302)
to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
110 V AC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302)
at a 110 V AC BTS3900A site
is to be upgraded, one package
is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,
such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs,
and one PMU. If more than twoPSUs are required, extra PSUs
must be quoted.
WD2BA48A
2D02
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.A.2 to
Ver.D,
-48VDC,
TMC11H,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.A 302)
to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a-48 V DC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.A 302)
at a -48 V DC BTS3900A site
is to be upgraded, one package
is configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, and fans.
WD2BR48A
2D00
BTS3900A
RFU
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.A to
Ver.D,
-48VDC)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
RFC
(Ver.A) to
an RFC
(Ver.D) at a
-48 V DC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an RFC (Ver.A) at a -48
V DC BTS3900A site is to be
upgraded, one package is
configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials requiredduring the RFC upgrade, such
as the DCDU and fans.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 40/239
Table 4-15 BTS3900A (Ver.B) cabinet upgrade packages
Model Description
Function MaximumQuant
ity
Configuration Principle
WD2B220B2
D00
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.B to
Ver.D,
220VAC,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.B) to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
220 V AC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a
220 V AC BTS3900A site is to
be upgraded, one package is
configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,
such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs,and one PMU. If more than two
PSUs are required, extra PSUs
must be quoted.
WD2B110B2
D00
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.B to
Ver.D,
110VAC,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.B) to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
110 V AC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a
110 V AC BTS3900A site is to
be upgraded, one package is
configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials requiredduring the APM30 upgrade,
such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs,
and one PMU. If more than two
PSUs are required, extra PSUs
must be quoted.
WD2BN48B
2D00
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.B to
Ver.D,
-48VDC,
TMC11H,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.B) to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
-48 V DC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.B) at a
-48 V DC BTS3900A site is to
be upgraded, one package isconfigured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,
such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, and fans.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 41/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2BR48B
2D00
BTS3900A
RFU
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.B to
Ver.D,
-48VDC)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
RFC (Ver.B)
to an RFC
(Ver.D) at a
-48 V DC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an RFC (Ver.B) at a -48
V DC BTS3900A site is to be
upgraded, one package is
configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the RFC upgrade, such
as the DCDU and fans.
Table 4-16 BTS3900A (Ver.C) cabinet upgrade packages
Model Description Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2B220C
2D00
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.C to
Ver.D,
220VAC,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.C) to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
220 V AC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a
220 V AC BTS3900A site is to be upgraded, one package is
configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,
such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs,
and one PMU. If more than two
PSUs are required, extra PSUs
must be quoted.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 42/239
Model Description Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2B110C
2D00
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.C to
Ver.D,
110VAC,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.C) to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
110 V AC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a
110 V AC BTS3900A site is to
be upgraded, one package is
configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,
such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, fans, two PSUs,
and one PMU. If more than twoPSUs are required, extra PSUs
must be quoted.
WD2BC48
C2D00
APM30H
Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.C to
Ver.D,
-48VDC,
TMC11H,
BTS3900A)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
APM30
(Ver.C) to an
APM30
(Ver.D) at a
-48 V DCBTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an APM30 (Ver.C) at a
-48 V DC BTS3900A site is to
be upgraded, one package is
configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the APM30 upgrade,such as the cabinet door, AC/
DC system, and fans.
WD2BR48
C2D00
BTS3900A
RFU Cabinet
Upgrade
Package
(Ver.C to
Ver.D,
-48VDC)
This
package is
used to
upgrade an
RFC (Ver.C)
to an RFC
(Ver.D) at a
-48 V DC
BTS3900A
site.
2 l Optional.
l When an RFC (Ver.C) at a -48
V DC BTS3900A site is to be
upgraded, one package is
configured for the cabinet.
l The configured package
includes all materials required
during the RFC upgrade, suchas the DCDU and fans.
4.2 BBU Configuration
This section describes the number of BBUs configured in various types of base stations, the
number of different types of boards in the BBU, and the slot assignment principles.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 43/239
4.2.1 BBU Case Configuration
The BBU is a mandatory component in 3900 series base stations. Different principles apply to
the BBU configuration in different types of base stations.
The following table lists the principles for configuring BBU cases in single-, dual-, and triple-
mode base stations.
Table 4-17 BBU Case Configuration Principle
Single/Dual/Triple-Mode Base Station
Configured Mode BBU Case ConfigurationPrinciple
Single-mode base station GSM One BBU is configured.
UMTS One BBU is configured.
LTE One BBU is configured.
Dual-mode base station GU The two modes share one
BBU, which is configured
with a GTMU/UMPT_G and
a WMPT/UMPT_U.
G*U The two modes share one
BBU, which is configured
with a UMPT in G*U (co-
MPT) mode.
GL The two modes share one
BBU, which is configured
with a GTMU/UMPT_G and
an LMPT/UMPT_L.
G*L The two modes share one
BBU, which is configured
with a UMPT in G*L (co-
MPT) mode.
UL The two modes share one
BBU, which is configured
with a WMPT/UMPT_U and
an LMPT/UMPT_L.
U*L The two modes share one
BBU, which is configured
with a UMPT in U*L (co-
MPT) mode.
UT The two modes share one
BBU, which is configured
with a WMPT/UMPT_U and
an LMPT/UMPT_T.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 44/239
Single/Dual/Triple-Mode Base Station
Configured Mode BBU Case ConfigurationPrinciple
L*T The two modes share one
BBU, which is configuredwith a UMPT in L*T (co-
MPT) mode.
Separate-MPT triple-mode
base station
GU+L Two BBUs are configured.
One BBU is shared by GSM
and UMTS, and the other
BBU is used by LTE.
GL+U Two BBUs are configured.
One BBU is shared by GSM
and LTE, and the other BBU
is used by UMTS.
GU+UL Two BBUs are configured.
One BBU is shared by GSM
and UMTS, and the other
BBU is shared by UMTS and
LTE.
GU+L(G) Two BBUs are configured.
One BBU is shared by GSM
and UMTS, and the other
BBU is used by LTE. The
two BBUs are
interconnected.
GL+U(G) Two BBUs are configured.
One BBU is shared by GSM
and LTE, and the other BBU
is used by UMTS. The two
BBUs are interconnected.
GU+UL(G) Two BBUs are configured.
One BBU is shared by GSM
and UMTS, and the other
BBU is shared by UMTS and
LTE. The two BBUs are
interconnected.
G[U*L] Three modes share one BBU.
The UMTS and LTE modes
share a UMPT, and the GSM
mode is supported by a
GTMU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 45/239
Single/Dual/Triple-Mode Base Station
Configured Mode BBU Case ConfigurationPrinciple
G[L*T] Three modes share one BBU.
The LTE FDD and LTE TDDmodes share a UMPT, and
the GSM mode is supported
by a GTMU.
U[L*T] Three modes share one BBU.
The LTE FDD and LTE TDD
modes share a UMPT, and
the UMTS mode is supported
by a WMPT/UMPT_U.
G[U*T] Three modes share one BBU.
The UMTS and LTE TDDmodes share a UMPT, and
the GSM mode is supported
by a GTMU.
Co-MPT triple-mode base
station
G*U*L The three modes share one
UMPT in one BBU.
G*U*T The three modes share one
UMPT in one BBU.
G*L*T The three modes share one
UMPT in one BBU.
U*L*T The three modes share one
UMPT in one BBU.
U*L*T
Quadruple-mode base station
with co-MPT
G*U*L*T The four modes share one
UMPT in one BBU.
GU+[L*T](G) Two BBUs are configured.
One BBU is shared by GSM
and UMTS, and the other
BBU is shared by LTE FDD
and LTE TDD.
4.2.2 BBU Board Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring various types of boards in the BBU.
GSM BBU Board Configurations
The following table lists the GSM BBU board configurations.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 46/239
NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes
Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections:
l For carrier specifications, see Capacity Specifications.
l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications.
l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
Table 4-18 GSM BBU board configurations
Model Description
Function
MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
GM5D0
0GTMU
01
GSM
Main
Control
and
Transpor
t Unit
(4E1&1
electrica
l
FE&1op
tical FE)
GSM
Transmi
ssion &
Timing
&
Manage
ment
Unit
type b
(GTMU
b)
l Provi
des
four
E1s.
l Provi
des
one
FE
electr
ical
port.
l Provi
dessix
CPRI
ports.
1 A GTMUb must be configured in the
following base stations:
l The base station is a GBTS
l Separate-MPT multimode base station
including a GBTS
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 47/239
Model Description
Function
MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
GM5D0
0UBRI0
0
Universa
l
BaseBan
d Radio
Interface
Board
(6CPRI
interface
)
Universa
l
baseban
d radio
interface
unit for
GSM
(UBRI)
Provides
six CPRI
ports.
1 The UBRI needs to be configured in the
following scenarios:
l More than six CPRI ports are required by
GSM.
l RFUs and RRUs are configured, which
include RRUs or RFUs in GSM mode.
l A UBRIb needs to be configured to
provide CPRI ports if the GSM mode is
deployed on the UMPT where co-MPT is
applied.
UMTS BBU Board Configurations
NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes
Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections:
l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications.
l
For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see BasebandSpecifications.
l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
The following table lists the UMTS BBU board configurations.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 48/239
Table 4-19 Configurations of the UMTS main control board
Model Description Function MaximumNumbe
r to BeConfigured in aSingleBBU
Configuration Principle
QWMD00
WMPT00
WCDMA Main
Control and
Transport Unit
(4E1&1Electric
al FE&1Optical
FE)
WCDMA
main
processing
and
transmission
unit (WMPT)
l Provides
four E1s/
T1s.
l Provides
one FE
electrical
port.
l Provides
one FE
optical
port.
1 One WMPT or UMPTa1
must be configured in a base
station of which the
supported modes include
UMTS, but the UMPTa1 and
WMPT cannot be configured
in the same BBU.
The main control board can
be configured in 1+1 backup
mode for UMTS only,
instead for GU or UL. When
1+1 backup is used, two
main control boards in the
same mode are configured in
one BBU.
Since SRAN7.0 or
RAN14.0, the UMPTa1 isrecommended. The
UMPTa1 is required when a
newly deployed site meets
any of the following
conditions:
1. IPSec as well as PKI is
supported.
2. The signaling processing
capability exceeds 170
CNBAP/s.
3. UMTS is served by theleaf BBU, and BBU
interconnection is
implemented by
connecting the UCIU and
UMPT.
4. There is a need for
UMTS-to-LTE
evolution.
5. This board can also be
configured when co-
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 49/239
Model Description Function MaximumNumber to Be
Configured in aSingleBBU
Configuration Principle
WD2D0UM
PT100
Universal Main
Processing and
Transmission
Board (4 E1s &
1 Electrical FE/
GE port & 1
Optical FE/GE
port, UMPTa1)
Universal
main
processing
and
transmission
unit type a1
(UMPTa1)
l Provides
four E1s/
T1s.
l Provides
one FE/GE
optical
port.
l Provides
one FE/GE
electrical
port.l Provides
one CI
port.
1 transmission is applied
and the GSM IPSec or
GSM PKI function is
enabled.
Since SRAN8.0, the
UMPTa1 allows any two or
all triple modes of GSM,
UMTS, and LTE to share one
main control board.
QWMDWB
BPD100
Baseband
Processing Unit
(6 Cell, CE:
UL192/DL192)
WCDMA
baseband
processing
board
l A
WBBPdx
provides
six CPRI
ports.
6 The number of WBBPs to be
configured in a base station
depends on the number of
cells, number of uplink and
downlink CEs, signaling
processing capability, and
number of CPRI ports to be
supported by the base
station.
QWMDWB
BPD300
Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL256/
DL256)
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 50/239
Model Description Function MaximumNumber to Be
Configured in aSingleBBU
Configuration Principle
QWMDWB
BPD200
l A
WBBPfx
provides
six CPRI
ports and
one HEI
port.
When the DC-HSDPA
+MIMO feature is used:
l If the WBBPd, WBBPf1,
WBBPf2, or WBBPf3 is
used, each sector must be
configured with one
WBBP.
l If the WBBPf4 is used,
every three sectors are
configured with one
WBBP.
When the feature
Independent Demodulation
of Signals from Multiple
RRUs in One Cell is used:
l If the WBBPd2 or
WBBPd3 is used, a cell
can be shared by amaximum of six RRUs
(2RX).
l If the WBBPd1 is used, a
cell can be shared by a
maximum of three RRUs
(2RX).
The WBBPd and WBBPf
can be configured in the
same base station.
Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL384/
DL384)
QWMDWB
BPF101
Baseband
Processing Unit(6Cell,
CE:UL192/
DL256)
QWMDWB
BPF201
Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL256/
DL384)
QWMDWB
BPF301
Baseband
Processing Unit(6Cell,
CE:UL384/
DL512)
QWMDWB
BPF400
Baseband
Processing Unit
(6Cell,
CE:UL512/
DL768)
LTE BBU Board Configurations
This section describes the configuration principles for LTE BBU boards.
The following table lists the LTE BBU board configurations.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 51/239
NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes
Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections:
l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications.
l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband
Specifications.
l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
Table 4-20 LTE BBU board configurations
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD2D00LMPT00
LTEMain
Processin
g &
Transmis
sion Unit
(With
GPS
Card)
LTE main processing andtransmission unit (LMPT)
l Provides two FE/GE
electrical ports.
l Provides two FE/GE
optical ports.
l Contains a GPS
satellite card.
1 One LMPT or UMPTa2 must be
configured in a base
station of which the
supported modes
include LTE, but the
UMPTa2 and LMPT
cannot be configured
in the same BBU.
The main control
board can be
configured in 1+1 backup mode for LTE
only, instead for GL
or UL.
In LTE or SRAN
scenarios, two UMPT
boards can share a
signaling resource
pool.
Since SRAN8.0, the
UMPTa2 allows any
two or all triple modesof GSM, UMTS, and
LTE to share one main
control board.
WD2D00UM
PT01
Universal
Main
Processing and
Transmis
sion
Board (4
E1s & 1
Electrical
FE/GE
port & 1
Optical
FE/GE
port,UMPTa2)
Universal main
processing and
transmission unit type a2(UMPTa2)
l Provides one FE/GE
electrical port.
l Provides one FE/GE
optical port.
l Provides four E1s/T1s.
1
WD2D0LBB
PC00
LTE
Baseband
Processin
g Unit C
LTE baseband processing
unit (LBBPc): provides
six CPRI ports.
6 The number of
LBBPs to be
configured in a base
station that supports
LTE depends on the
number of cells,
bandwidth, antenna
configuration, and
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 52/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD2DLBBP
D100
LTE
Baseband
Processin
g Unit D1
number of CPRI ports
to be supported by the
base station.
A BBU in LTE mode
is configured with at
least one LBBP, and
each LBBP is
configured with a
maximum of six RF
modules.
The LBBPc andLBBPd can be
configured in the
same base station.
When the LBBPc is
configured:
l In SISO, DL 2x2
MIMO, and UL
2x2 MU-MIMO
modes, one
LBBPc supports
three cells, eachwith a scalable
bandwidth of
1.4/3/5/10/15/20
MHz.
l When DL 4x2
MIMO or UL 4-
antenna receive
diversity is used,
one LBBPc
supports three
cells, each with ascalable
bandwidth of
1.4/3/5/10 MHz,
or one cell with a
scalable
bandwidth of
15/20 MHz.
l When DL 2x2
MIMO and UL
2x2 MU-MIMO is
used, the three
LTE baseband processing
unit (LBBPd1): Provides
six CPRI ports and one
HEI port.
WD2DLBBP
D101
LTE
Baseband
Processin
g Unit D1
LTE baseband processing
unit (LBBPd1): Provides
six CPRI ports and one
HEI port.
WD2D0LBB
PD02
LTE
BasebandProcessin
g Unit D2
LTE baseband processing
unit (LBBPd2): Providessix CPRI ports and one
HEI port.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 53/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD2D0LBB
PD03
LTE
Baseband
LTE baseband processing
unit (LBBPd3): Provides
cells supported by
a single LBBPc
can be configured
with different
bandwidth, for
example, 3 x (5
MHz/10 MHz+10
MHz) or (15 MHz
+5 MHz+5 MHz).
When the LBBPd is
configured:
l When 2x2 MIMO
is used, each
LBBPd1 supports
a maximum of
three cells with a
scalable
bandwidth of
1.4/3/5/10/15/20
MHz.
l When 2x2 MIMO,
4x2 MIMO, or 4-
way receive
diversity is used,
each LBBPd2
supports a
maximum of three
cells with a
scalable
bandwidth of
1.4/3/5/10/15/20
MHz.
l When 2x2 MIMO
is used, each
LBBPd3 supports
a maximum of six
cells with a
scalable
bandwidth of
1.4/3/5/10/15/20
MHz, and the six
cells can use
different
bandwidth.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 54/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
Processin
g Unit D3
six CPRI ports and one
HEI port.
WD2DLBBPD100
will no longer be sold
but will gradually be
replaced by
WD2DLBBPD101.
Common Board Configurations
This section describes the principles for configuring common boards in a BBU.
The following table lists the principles for configuring common main control board, power and
environment interface unit, and baseband processing board in the BBU.
NOTE
For the board specifications, obtain 3900 Series Base Station Technical Description, expand the nodes
Product Specifications -> Technical Specifications of the BBU3900, and see the following sections:
l For CPRI specifications, see CPRI Specifications.
l For signaling specifications, see Signaling Specifications. For baseband specifications, see Baseband
Specifications.
l For transmission specifications, see Transmission Port Specifications.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 55/239
Table 4-21 Main control board, power and environment interface unit, and baseband processing board
ExternalModel
Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00
0PEU03
HERT BBU
WD2MUPE
UC, -48 V
Power and
Environment
Interface
Unit
HERT BBU
WD2MUPEUC,
-48 V Power and
Environment
Interface Unit
Power supply
module of 360 W
in a BBU.
2 At a new site, the BBU (02319940) is configured
with a UPEUc board by default, which provides
360 W power. If power backup (less than or equal
to 360 W) is required or high-power RRUs
(greater than 360 W and less than or equal to 650
W) need to be configured, one more UPEUc board
needs to be configured.
At a site where capacity needs to be expanded, if
one or two UPEUa boards have been configured,
replace the UPEUa board with two UPEUc
boards. If a UPEUc board has been configured before capacity expansion, add a UPEUc board.
The UPEUa and UPEUc boards cannot be
configured together. The UPEUa and UPEUc
boards use different designs. If they are
configured together, the total power supply
capacity ranges from 330 W to 360 W. Therefore,
if the power consumption of a BBU is 360 W and
the UPEUc board malfunctions, only the UPEUa
board in the BBU supplies power and the power
consumption of the BBU exceeds the maximum
power supply of the UPEUa board. As a result,the BBU will be powered off.
WD2M00
PEIUD2
Function
Module,HE
RT
BBU,WD2
MUPEUD2,
Power and
Environment
Interface
Unit(-48 V)
Function Module,
HERT
BBU,WD2MUPE
UD2, Power and
Environment
Interface Unit (-48
V)
Power supply
module of 650 W
in a BBU.
2 At a new site, the BBU (02310JJE) is configured
with a UPEUd board by default, which provides
650 W power. If power backup (less than or equal
to 650 W) is required, one more UPEUd board
needs to be configured.
At a site where capacity needs to be expanded, the
capability of circuit breakers must be greater than
or equal to 20 A because the circuit breakers of
existing cabinets need to be restructured during
the capacity expansion.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 56/239
ExternalModel
Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DUMPTB10
0
UniversalMain
Processing
and
Transmissio
n Board
(4E1&1
Electrical
FE/GE&1
Optical FE/
GE,
UMPTb1)
UMPTb1,universal main
processing and
transmission
board
l Provides four
E1s/T1s.
l Provides one
FE/GE optical
port.
l Provides one
FE/GEelectrical port.
l Provides one
CI port.
In a co-MPT
multimod
e base
station or a
hybrid-
MPT base
station
configure
d with one
BBU: 1
In a co-MPT
multimod
e base
station or a
hybrid-
MPT base
station
configure
d with two
BBUs: 2
In aseparate-
MPT base
station:
l One
BBU:
2
l BBU
interco
nnecti
on: 2
A UMPTb1 must be configured in an eGBTS.The UMPTb1 in UMTS mode is configured in the
following scenarios:
l From RAN14.0 onwards, this board can be
configured to support the UMTS mode.
l The base stations need to supportIPSec
and PKI features.
l The signaling specification exceeds 170
CNBAP/s.
l There is a requirement for UMTS-to-LTE
transition.l The UMPTb1 working in UMTS mode cannot
be configured in the BBU where a WMPT is
configured.
The UMPTb1 board working in LTE mode cannot
be configured in the BBU where an LMPT board
has been configured.
The UMPTb1 in multi-mode is configured in the
following scenarios:
l From SRAN8.0 onwards, the UMPTb1 board
is recommended for single-mode and multi-mode base stations.
l A UMPTb1 is mandatory in a co-MPT
multimode base station.
l A UMPTb1 is optional in the GU or GL
multimode co-transmission scenarios where
the GSM needs to supportIPSec and PKI
features.
l A separate-MPT base station needs to use
UCIU+UMPT interconnection. In this case, a
UMPTb1 must be configured in BBU 1.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 57/239
ExternalModel
Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2D0UMPTB01 UniversalMain
Processing &
Transmissio
n unit with 4
E1s and 2 FE/
GE ports,
UMPTb2
UMPTb2,universal main
processing and
transmission
board
l Provides one
FE/GE
electrical port.
l Provides one
FE/GE optical
port.
l Provides four E1s/T1s.
l Provides one
CI port for
BBU
interconnectio
n.
l Provides the
GPS clock
port.
In a co-MPT
multimod
e base
station or a
hybrid-
MPT base
station
configure
d with one
BBU: 1
In a co-
MPT
multimod
e base
station or a
hybrid-
MPT base
station
configure
d with two
BBUs: 2
In a
separate-
MPT base
station:
l One
BBU:
2
l BBU
interco
nnecti
on: 2
l
The UMPTb2 board achieves synchronizationwith a GPS clock. For a new SRAN or LTE
TDD site that needs to be synchronized with a
GPS clock, a UMPTb2 board is preferentially
delivered.
l For a new GSM only (eGBTS) or UMTS only
site that needs to be synchronized with a GPS
clock, a USCU board is preferentially
delivered. In addition, a UMPTb2 board can
be delivered.
GM5D0U
BRIB00
Universal
BaseBand
Radio
Interface
Board (6
CPRI
interface,
UBRIb)
Universal
baseband radio
interface unit
(UBRIb)
Provides six CPRI
ports.
In a
separate-
MPT base
station: 1
In a co-
MPT base
station: 2
A UBRIb board must be configured in the
following scenarios:
l More than six CPRI ports are required by
GSM.
l RFUs and RRUs are configured, which
include RRUs or RFUs in GSM mode.
l A UBRIb needs to be configured to provide
CPRI ports if the GSM mode is deployed on
the UMPT where co-MPT is applied.
l Provides CPRI ports if the GSM mode is
deployed on the UMPT.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 58/239
ExternalModel
Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DUBBPD100 UniversalBaseband
Processing
Unit d1
The universal baseband
processing board
(UBBPd1)
provides six CPRI
ports.
In GSMmode,
when the
GTMUb
board is
used as the
main
control
board, a
maximum
of five
baseband
processing
boards can
be
configure
d; when
the UMPT
board is
used as the
main
control
board, a
maximumof six
baseband
processing
boards can
be
configure
d.
In UMTS
or LTE
mode, a
maximumof six
baseband
processing
boards can
be
configure
d.
From SRAN9.0 onwards, the UBBPd board isrecommended for UMTS only or LTE only mode.
The UBBPd board supports single mode or
multiple modes sharing the same baseband
processing board.
The UBBPd board can be used together with the
WBBP or LBBP board.
In capacity expansion scenarios, it is
recommended that the existing baseband
processing boards be fully configured and the
UBBPd board be added to provide the remaining
capacity.In GBSS16.0, the UBBP board must be
configured for the GSM single mode in the
following scenarios:
l VAMOS FR, VAMOS II, 4-way receive
diversity, antenna frequency hopping, or
MICC is enabled.
l The AAU3902 supports the GSM mode.
UMTS single mode:
l From RAN16.0 onwards, the UBBP board is
recommended for the UMTS single mode.
LTE single mode:
l In eRAN6.0, the UBBPd3 and UBBPd4
boards apply to the LTE single mode.
l In eRAN7.0, the UBBPd3, UBBPd4,
UBBPd5, and UBBPd6 boards apply to the
LTE single mode.
l The specifications of UBBPd4 through
UBBPd6 in LTE only mode for different
combinations of cells are as follows:
– The UBBPd4 does not support the mixed
combination of 2T2R and 2T4R or 4T4R.
– The UBBPd5 supports a maximum of six
2T2R cells or supports a maximum of three
2T2R or 4T4R cells.
– The UBBPd6 supports the combinations of
any two of 2T2R, 2T4R, 4T4R with a
maximum of 3 cells of either mode.
– The UBBPd6 configured with 2T2R
supports a maximum of six cells.
WD2DU
BBPD200
Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d2
The universal
baseband
processing board
(UBBPd2)
provides six CPRI
ports.
WD2DU
BBPD300
Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d3
The universal
baseband
processing board
(UBBPd3)
provides six CPRI
ports.
WD2DU
BBPD400
Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d4
The universal
baseband
processing board
(UBBPd4) provides six CPRI
ports.
WD2DU
BBPD500
Universal
Baseband
Processing
Unit d5
The universal
baseband
processing board
(UBBPd5)
provides six CPRI
ports.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 59/239
ExternalModel
Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DUBBPD600 UniversalBaseband
Processing
Unit d6
The universal baseband
processing board
(UBBPd6)
provides six CPRI
ports.
–The UBBPd6 configured with either 2T4R or 4T4R supports a maximum of six cells.
Multimode and co-BBP scenarios:
l In a GU dual-mode base station, the UBBPd1,
UBBPd2, UBBPd3, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, or
UBBPd6 board must be configured.
l In a GL dual-mode base station, the UBBPd3,
UBBPd4, UBBPd5, or UBBPd6 board must
be configured.
l In a UL dual-mode base station, the UBBPd6
board must be configured.
l In a GUL triple-mode base station, the
UBBPd6 board must be configured.
In SRAN6.0, three modes can be deployed on two BBUs. For example, GSM and UMTS are
deployed on one BBU and LTE mode is deployed on the other BBU, or GSM and LTE are
deployed on one BBU and UMTS mode is deployed on the other BBU. The two BBUs cannot
share transmission resources or clock signals. Configurations of LTE mode in GU+L mode are
the same as those of LTE only mode. In GL+U mode, UMTS configurations are the same as the
configurations in UMTS only mode.
In SRAN7.0, two BBUs can be interconnected to support three modes, such as GU+L(G) and
GL+U(G). In addition, transmission resources and clock signals can be shared between two
interconnected BBUs. From SRAN7.0 onwards, the UMPT board is introduced to support the
mainstream solution of co-transmission and the UTRPc board is used for the alternative solution
of co-transmission.
In RAN14.0, the UTRPa board is introduced (used only for UMTS) to replace the UTRP3 and
UTRP4 boards, which will enter the EOM phase.
In SRAN8.0, co-MPT is introduced. In co-MPT scenarios, co-transmission is recommended.
The following table lists the principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 60/239
NOTE
For details about the specifications of each board, see the following contents in 3900 Series Base Station
Technical Description: Product Specifications > Technical Specifications of the BBU3900. For details
about the transmission specifications, see Transmission Port.
Table 4-22 Principles for configuring clock and transmission boards in a BBU
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2D00
USCU00
Universal
Satellite
Clock Unit
USCUb11,
clock board
used for
LTE,
without a
satellite
card
1 This board needs to be configured for the LTE mode
when any of the following conditions is met:
l This board is required when a BITS reference clock
source is used for the LTE mode.
l This board is required when the LTE mode is not
configured with a main control board that has a built-in GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA
function.
l This board is required when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or
RGPS clock is used for the LTE mode.
WD2D0U
SCU300
Universal
Synchroniz
ation Clock
Unit
Supporting
GPS andBITS
USCUb14,
clock board
with a
built-in u-
blox GPS
satellitecard
1 This board is optional and can be configured from
SRAN7.0, GBSS14.0, or RAN14.0 onwards.
l This board is required when GPS or BITS clock
synchronization is used for the GSM or UMTS mode.
l This board is required when a BITS reference clock
source is used for the LTE mode.
l This board is required when the LTE mode is not
configured with a main control board that has a built-
in GPS satellite card but requires the GPS or OTDOA
function.
l This board is required when the UMTS mode requires
the OTDOA function.
l In GU/GL/UL dual-mode base station, this board is
required when GPS or BITS clock synchronization is
used for GSM or UMTS, or when BITS clock
synchronization is used for LTE.l This board is required in a GU/GL/UL dual-mode
base station where the Common Clock feature is
activated and GPS or BITS clock synchronization is
used.
l This board is required in either a single- or multimode
base station when the 1PPS/1PPS+TOD or RGPS
clock is used for the LTE mode.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 61/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2D00
UCIU00
Universal
CascadingInterface
Unit
UCIU for
BBUinterconne
ction. It
provides
one port for
connecting
to the root
BBU and
five ports
for
connecting
to the leaf
BBUs.
1 For a separate-MPT triple-mode base station, BBU 0
needs to be configured with the UCIU if the two BBUsare interconnected by connecting the UCIU in one BBU
and the UMPT in the other BBU.
In GU dual mode, the UCIU board is required when a
cabinet used by a 3900 series base station and a cabinet
used by a 3012 series base station are installed side by
side. In this case, the GTMUb board is mandatory and
the UCIU board cannot be used for BBU
interconnection.
GM5DUT
RPB400
GSM TDM
over E1/T1
Interface
Unit
Transmissi
on
extension
board for
GSM
(UTRPb4)
Provides
eight E1s/
T1s over
TDM
1 This board is required when five to eight E1s/T1s need
to be provided for GSM.
QWMD0U
TRP300
Iub ATM
Interface
Unit (8
E1s)
UTRP3,
UMTS
transmissio
n extension
board
Supporting
eight E1s
over ATM
4 This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the main
control and transmission board in UMTS mode support
ATM transmission and more than four E1s/T1s over
ATM ports are required.
QWMP0U
TRP400
Iub IP
InterfaceUnit (8
E1s)
UTRP4,
UMTStransmissio
n extension
board
Supporting
eight E1s
over IP
4 This board is required when the E1 ports on the main
control and transmission board in UMTS mode supportIP transmission and more than four E1s over IP are
required.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 62/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0U
TRP900
Iub IP
InterfaceUnit (4 FE/
GE
Electrical
ports)
UTRP9,
UMTStransmissio
n extension
board
Provides
four FE/GE
electrical
ports.
4 This board is required when two or more FE electrical
ports or any GE electrical port is used by UMTS.Each board provides four FE/GE electrical ports, and the
number of the boards to be configured is determined by
the required number of FE/GE electrical ports.
QWMP0U
TRP200
Iub IP
Interface
Unit (2 FE/
GE Optical ports)
UTRP2,
UMTS
transmissio
n extension board
Provides
two FE/GE
optical
ports.
4 This board is required when two or more FE optical ports
or any GE optical port is used by UMTS.
In SRAN7.0 or RAN14.0, the UTRPc is configured by
default.
QWMD0U
TRP600
Iub ATM
Interface
Unit
(1Unchann
elizedSTM-1)
UTRP6,
UMTS
transmissio
n extension
boardProvides
one
unchanneli
zed STM-1
port
4 This board is required when unchannelized STM-1
transmission is used by UMTS.
QWMD0U
TRPA00
Universal
Transmissi
on
Resource
Processing
Unit (8E1/
T1)
UTRPa:
UMTS
transmissio
n extension
board. It
provides
eight ATM
or IP over
E1 ports.
4 l This board is required when the E1/T1 ports on the
main processing and transmission board in UMTS
mode support ATM or IP transmission and more than
four E1/T1 ports are required.
lEach board provides eight E1/T1 ports, and thenumber of the boards to be configured is determined
by the required number of E1/T1 ports.
l The ATM transmission and IP transmission cannot
be used together.
l The delivered UTRPa board supports the plug-and-
play function in RAN14.0 and RAN14.1, and the
delivered board cannot be customized. From
RAN15.0 onwards, this board is supported by using
software.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 63/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
QWMD0U
TRPC00
Universal
Transmission
Resource
Processing
Unit (4
Electrical
FE/GE
ports & 2
Optical FE/
GE ports)
Transmissi
onextension
board for
WCDMA
(UTRPc)
l Works
in
GSM,
UMTS,
or LTE
mode.
l Provides four
FE/GE
electric
al ports.
l Provide
s two
FE/GE
optical
ports.
1 Optional. This board is introduced in SRAN7.0,
GBSS14.0, RAN14.0, and eRAN3.0. The GSM, UMTS,and LTE modes can share one UTRPc board. From
SRAN7.0 onwards, the UTRPc board is recommended
for increasing FE/GE ports in all modes. When the
GTMUa board is used, the UTRPc board cannot be used
for transmission capacity expansion.
l This board is required when a base station that uses
triple-mode co-transmission is not configured with a
UMPT, or is configured with a UMPT but requires
expansion of the transmission capability.
l This board is required when IPSec needs to be
supported for GSM.l This board is required when IPSec is used for UMTS
and no UMPT is configured for UMTS.
l This board is required when GE ports are required by
GSM.
QCUBBB
ULIG01
Lighting
Arrester
Box
SLPU:
surge
protection
box for
transmissio
n
1 l Each surge protection box is configured with a
maximum of four surge protection boards.
l A BTS3900AL cabinet contains one surge protection
box. One piece needs to be configured when more
than four surge protection boards are required.
WD2P00U
ELP00
Universal
E1/T1
Lighting
Protection
Unit
UELP:
universal
E1/T1
lightning
protection
unit
- l Every four E1 ports are configured with one package
for surge protection.
l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains two E1 surge
protection packages. This board needs to be
configured when more than two E1 surge protection
packages are required.
WD2P0UF
LPB00
Universal
FE/GE
Lighting
Protection
Unit
UFLPb:
universal
FE/GE
lightning
protection
unit
- l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with
one package for surge protection.
l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE
surge protection package. This board needs to be
configured when more than one FE/GE surge
protection package is required.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 64/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2P0UF
LPC00
Universal
FE/GELighting
Protection
Unit
UFLPc:
universalFE/GE
lightning
protection
unit
- l Every two FE/GE electrical ports are configured with
one package for surge protection.l A BTS3900AL AC cabinet contains one FE/GE
surge protection package. This board needs to be
configured when more than one FE/GE surge
protection package is required.
4.2.3 CPRI Networking Configurations
The following table lists the CPRI networking configuration principles.
NOTE
The CPRI networking configuration principles apply to a BBU3900.
Table 4-23 CPRI networking configuration principles
Application Scenario
Networking Topology
Configuration Principle
Multimode
SDR RF
modules in
separate-MPT
scenarios
Dual-star The dual-star topology is recommended.
CPRI MUX l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and GTMUb must be
configured in GU CPRI MUX mode. The WBBPf/UBBPd_U must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that
process both GSM and UMTS signals. The WBBPf/
UBBPd_U must be installed in slot 2 or 3.
l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and GTMUb must be
configured in GL CPRI MUX mode. The LBBPd/
UBBPd_L must connect to CPRI fiber optic cables that
process both GSM and LTE signals. The LBBPd or
UBBPd_L must be installed in slot 2 or 3.
l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and WBBPf/UBBPd_U must be
configured in UL CPRI MUX mode. The LBBPd/
UBBPd_L or WBBPf/UBBPd_U must connect to CPRIfiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE
signals. Baseband processing boards that connect to
fiber optic cables must be installed in slot 2 or 3.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 65/239
Application Scenario
Networking Topology
Configuration Principle
Multimode
SDR RFmodules in
co-MPT
scenarios
CPRI MUX The CPRI MUX topology is recommended.
l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and UBRIb must be configuredin GU CPRI MUX mode. The UBRIb must connect to
CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and
UMTS signals. The WBBPf/UBBPd_U must be
installed in slot 2 or 3. The UBRIb must be installed in
slot 0 or 1.
l The LBBPd/UBBPd_L and UBRIb must be configured
in GL CPRI MUX mode. The UBRIb must connect to
CPRI fiber optic cables that process both GSM and LTE
signals. The LBBPd or UBBPd_L must be installed in
slot 2 or 3. The UBRIb must be installed in slot 1.
l The WBBPf/UBBPd_U and LBBPd/UBBPd_L must beconfigured in UL CPRI MUX mode. The WBBPf/
UBBPd_U or LBBPd/UBBPd_L must connect to CPRI
fiber optic cables that process both UMTS and LTE
signals. Baseband processing boards that connect to
fiber optic cables must be installed in slot 2 or 3.
Load sharing
mode (for
transition of
existing sites)
l In the GU SDR load-sharing networking topology, the
WBBPa/WBBPb/WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd_U and
UBRI/UBRIb are configured. Both the GSM and
UMTS baseband processing boards are connected to
CPRI fiber optic cables.
l In the GL SDR load-sharing networking topology, the
LBBPc/LBBPd/UBBPd_L and UBRI/UBRIb are
configured. Both the GSM and LTE baseband
processing boards are connected to CPRI fiber optic
cables.
l In the UL SDR load-sharing networking topology, the
WBBPa/WBBPb/WBBPd/WBBPf/UBBPd_U and
LBBPc/LBBPd/UBBPd_L are configured. Both the
UMTS and LTE baseband processing boards are
connected to CPRI fiber optic cables.
4.3 RF Module Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules in a 3900 series base station.
RFU and RRU ConfigurationRF Module Configurations 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station The type of RF modules
to be used is determined by the frequency band. Each sector is configured with at least one RF module. The number
of RF modules to be configured depends on the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.The
following table lists the relationships between sectors and RF modules. For details about the frequency bands, number
of sectors and carriers, and output power supported by each type of RF module, see technical specifications of RRUs
and RFUs.RF module configurationsConfiguration ScenarioRF Module ConfigurationTransmit diversity2x2
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 66/239
MIMOMIMO PrimeTwo TX channels are required for one sector:Two 1T modulesa are configured for one
sector.One 2Tb or 4T module is configured for one sector.DL 4x2 MIMODL 4x4 MIMOFour TX channels are
required for one sector:Two 2T modules are configured for one sector.One 4T module is configured for one sector.
1T modules cannot be used in this configuration scenario. UL 4-way DiversityUL 2x4 multi-user MIMO (MU-
MIMO)Four RX channels are required for one sector:Two 2R modules are configured for one sector.One 4R moduleis configured for one sector.a: In versions earlier than SRAN6.0, when two 1T RF modules are configured to support
MIMO, the two RF modules must be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports. From SRAN6.0 onwards, it is
recommended that the two RF modules be cascaded by connecting CPRI ports.b: In UMTS mode, two 2T RF modules
in one sector support UL 4-way diversity but do not support carrier or power expansion. If RFUs and RRUs are used
in the same base station, they cannot operate in the same frequency band.The application scenarios supported by RF
modules vary according to the working mode of the RF modules, as shown in the following table.RF module
configuration restrictionsModeRestrictionGSMThe DRFUs support UL 4-way diversity.From GBSS16.0/SRAN9.0,
the UBBPd is introduced to process GSM baseband signals and support UL 4-way diversity.The DRFU, RRU3004,
and 2T RF modules support the transmit diversity.When 4-way receive diversity is used, two DRFUs must be
configured.When PBT or transmit diversity is used, each DRFU or RRU3004 supports only one TRX. Each cell
served by the GSM DRFU or RRU3004 supports a maximum of two TRXs. When transmit diversity is used, the
maximum number of carriers supported by each GSM RF module with two transmit channels decreases by half.When
transmit diversity is used, the DRFU and RRU3004 do not support PBT. When UL 4-way diversity is used, the
DRFU does not support TMA. When 4-way diversity is used, each cell supports a maximum of two TRXs.In an
eGBTS, the RF modules do not support transmit diversity.UMTSRFUs support transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and
UL 4-way diversity.RRUs support DL transmit diversity, 2x2 MIMO, and UL 4-way diversity.LTEThe following
configuration scenarios are supported: 2x2 MIMO, UL 4-way diversity, DL 4x2 MIMO, UL 2x4 MU-MIMO, and
DL 4x4 MIMO. When DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO is used, two cascaded 2T RF modules or one 4T RF module
is required. 1T RF modules do not support DL 4x2 MIMO or DL 4x4 MIMO.RF Modules Working at Band 8 (900
MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working
at 900 MHz. RFUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. RFU configuration
Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M9EMRFU05 (used for the
BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUe for Multi-Mode 900MHz EGSM MRFUe working at the 900 M EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum
output power is 1x125 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE
(supported only in multimode base stations), GU SDR, or GL SDR mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L
site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
WD5M9EMRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU03 (used for the
BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM This module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced
MRFUd. MRFUd working at the 900 M EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output
power is 2x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU,
or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to
be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and
BTS3900L) WD5P9PMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM This module
is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. MRFUd working at the 900 M PGSM band: The module has
two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960
MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a
BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
WD5M9EMRFU07 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9EMRFU05 (used for the
BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM MRFU V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The
module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925
MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, LTE, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12
At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 67/239
of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
WD5M9PMRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) WD5P9PMRFU01 (used for the
BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM This module will no longer be sold. MRFU V2 working
at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL:
890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined
by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
WD5P9PMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM MRFU V2 working at
the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL:
890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined
by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
WD5P9EMRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM MRFU V2 working
at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL:
880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined
by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9EMRFU06 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
WD5M9EMRFU13 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900MHz EGSM Enhanced MRFUd
working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80
W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At
a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M9PMRFU06 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
WD5M9PMRFU13 (used for the BTS3900AL) MRFUd for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM Enhanced MRFUd
working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At
a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9PGRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
GM5P9PGRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz PGSM This module will no longer be sold. Multi-
carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output
power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined
by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9EGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9EGRFU02
(used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz EGSM This module will no longer be sold. Multi-carrier RFU
working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80
W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number
of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications
of RFUs. GM5M9PGRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9PGRFU02 (used for the
BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz PGSM Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module
has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to
960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The
number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9EGRFU04 (used for the
BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P9EGRFU04 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU V2 900 MHz EGSM
Multi-carrier RFU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 68/239
output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a
BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M9EDRFU00 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) DRFU
900 MHz EGSM DRFU working with 35 MHz bandwidth at the 900 MHz EGSM band UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz;DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a
BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
GM5M9PDRFU00 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) DRFU 900 MHz PGSM DRFU working
with 25 MHz bandwidth at the 900 MHz PGSM band UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can
work in GSM mode. At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12 At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of
packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details
about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. RRUs Working at Band 8 (900 MHz)The following
table lists the RRU configuration. RRU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration
Principle WD5M9P392900 RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3929 working at the 900 MHz PGSM
band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz;
DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C
site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured
is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E392931 RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3929
working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60
W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At
a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The
number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For
details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E392800 RRU3928 for Multi-Mode
900 MHz EGSM RRU3928 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels and its
maximum output power is 2x40 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900Lsite using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL
site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and
output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9PDRRU00
RRU3004 900 MHz PGSM RRU3004 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935
MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9EDRRU00 RRU3004 900 MHz EGSM RRU3004 working at the 900
MHz EGSM band: UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900
site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and
output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9PGRRU04
RRU3008 900 MHz PGSM RRU3008 V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL:
935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured
is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M9EGRRU06 RRU3008 900 MHz EGSM RRU3008 V2 working at
the 900 MHz EGSM band: UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a
DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
WD5M9PMRRU04 RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3908 V2 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band:
UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a
DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets:
6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages
to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9EMRRU03 RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 900 MHz EGSM
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 69/239
RRU3908 V2 working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can
work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D
cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M9P392600 RRU3926 for Multi-mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3926 working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The
module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935
MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a
BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using
Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number
of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs. WD5M9E392600 RRU3926 for Multi-mode 900 MHz EGSM RRU3926 working at the 900 MHz EGSM
band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz;
DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site:
1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L
using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9P393600 RRU3936 for Multi-mode 900 MHz PGSM RRU3936, blade RRU
working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80
W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, GU, or GL mode. At a
DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets:
6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages
to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E393600 RRU3936 for Multi-mode 900 MHz EGSM
RRU3936, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum
output power is 1x80 W. UL: 880 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 925 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, GU,
or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B
or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Thenumber of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For
details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9P393800 RRU3938 for Multi-Mode
900 MHz PGSM RRU3938, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz PGSM band: The module has two transmit channels
and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in
GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B
or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The
number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For
details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M9E393800 RRU3938 for Multi-Mode
900 MHz EGSM RRU3938, blade RRU working at the 900 MHz EGSM band: The module has two transmit channels
and its maximum output power is 2x40 W. UL: 890 MHz to 915 MHz; DL: 935 MHz to 960 MHz It can work in
GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B
or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The
number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For
details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)
2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at
1800 MHz.RFUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration.RFU
configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M18MRFU32 (used for
the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU32 (used for the BTS3900AL)MRFUe for Multi-Mode
1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its
maximum output power is 1x125 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number
of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.WD5M18MRFU05 (used for the BTS3900,
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 70/239
BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU05 (used for the BTS3900AL)MRFUd for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzThis
module is no longer sold after GA of the enhanced MRFUd. Multimode RF modules working at the 1800 MHz full
bandThe module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz;
DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications
of RFUs.WD5M18MRFU07 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5MP18MRFU15 (used for
the BTS3900AL)MRFUd for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzEnhanced MRFUd working at the 1800 MHz band:The module
has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz
to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site:
12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.WD5M18MRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU03 (used for the
BTS3900AL)RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 1800 MHz AThis module will no longer be sold. MRFU working at segment
A of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710
MHz to 1770MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1875 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.WD5M18MRFU04 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU04
(used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 1800 MHz BThis module will no longer be sold. MRFU
working at segment B of the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power
is 1x80 W.UL: 1725 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1820 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or
GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18WD5M18MRFU06 (used for the
BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P18MRFU06 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit V2 for multi-mode
1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its
maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM,
UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet:
18GM5M18GRFU03 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)GM5P18GRFU03 (used for theBTS3900AL)GRFU V2 1800 M AThis module will no longer be sold. Multi-carrier RFU working at segment A of
the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz
to 1770 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1875 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site:
12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.GM5M18GRFU04 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)GM5P18GRFU04 (used for the
BTS3900AL)GRFU V2 1800 M BThis module will no longer be sold. Multi-carrier RFU working at segment B of
the 1800 MHz band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1725 MHz
to 1785 MHz; DL: 1820 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site:
12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18GM5M18GRFU05 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
GM5P18GRFU05 (used for the BTS3900AL)GRFU V2 1800 MMulti-carrier RFU working at the 1800 MHz full
band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz;
DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL
cabinet: 18GM5M18DRFU00 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)DRFU 1800 MDRFU working
at 1800 MHz:Supporting the full 1800 MHz bandUL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can
work in GSM mode.At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages
to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.RRUs Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)The following table lists
the RRU configuration.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration
PrincipleWD5M18392931RRU3929 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz
full band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At
a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 71/239
to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18393900RRU3939 for Multi-Mode 1800
MHzRRU3939, blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit channels and its
maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM,
LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site:9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output
power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18392800RRU3928 for
Multi-Mode 1800 MHzMultimode RF module working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has two transmit
channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt
can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D
cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs.GM6M18DRRU00RRU3004 1800 MHzRRU3004 working at the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1785
MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12The number of packages to be
configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18GRRU00RRU3008 1800 MHz ARRU3008 V1
working at the lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1850
MHzIt can work in GSM mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12The number of packages to be configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18GRRU01RRU3008 1800 MHz BRRU3008 V1 working at the higher 45 MHz
segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1740 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1835 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM
mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs.WD5M18MRRU01RRU for Multi-Mode 1800 MHz ARRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the
lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1850 MHzIt can
work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode. The UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a
BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9Select this package based on the frequency
band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs.WD5M18MRRU02RRU for Multi-Mode 1800 MHz BRRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the
lower 45 MHz segment of the 1800 MHz band:UL: 1740 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1835 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can
work in GSM, LTE, or GL mode. The UMTS mode is supported in terms of hardware.WD5M18392600RRU3926
Multi-Mode for 1800 MHzRRU3926 working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and
its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in
GSM, UMTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L
site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL
site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and
output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M18393600RRU3936
Multi-Mode for 1800 MHzRRU3936, multimode blade RRU working at the 1800 MHz full band:The module has
one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL: 1805 MHz to
1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D
cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs.WD5M18393800RRU3938 for Multi-Mode 1800 MHzRRU3938 working at the 1800 MHz full band:The
module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1785 MHz; DL:
1805 MHz to 1880 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, or GL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D
cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9At a BTS3900C site: 1The number of packages to be configured is determined
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 72/239
by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 5 (850 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section
describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 850 MHz. RFUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)The
following table lists the RFU configuration. RFU configuration Model Counter Description Function Maximum
Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M85MRFU00 (for BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L) WD5P85MRFU00(for BTS3900AL) RF Unit V2 for multi-mode 850MHz MRFU V2 working at the 850 MHz band: The module has
one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 824 MHz to 846.5 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to
891.5 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet:
12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.The number of packages
to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs. QWMMWRFU8500 (for BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L)
QWMPWRFU8500 (for BTS3900AL) RF Unit for UMTS 850 MHz (80 W) WRFU working at segment A of the
850 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 824 MHz to
835 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 880 MHz It can work in UMTS mode. BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L
cabinet: 12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.
RRUs Working at Band 5 (850 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration. RRU configuration Model
Counter Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5MJRUA850A RRU3936 Multi-
Mode for 850MHz RRU3936, multimode blade RRU working at the 850 MHz full band: The module has one transmit
channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869MHz to 894MHzIt can work
in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9At a
BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power.For the specifications, see .For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RRUs. WD5M85394200 RRU3942 for Multi-Mode 850 MHz RRU3942 working at 850 MHz:
The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. UL:
824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. It supports four carriers
and four antennas. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Selectthis package based on the frequency band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RRUs. QWEMRRU5A300 RRU for UMTS 850 MHz (40 W) RRU3801E working at 850 MHz:
UL: 824 MHz to 834 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 879 MHz It can work in UMTS mode. It supports a maximum of two
carriers. The maximum output power is 40 W. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.D)
cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the frequency band requirements.The number of
packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details
about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. QWEMRRU50200 RRU for UMTS 850MHz (60
W) RRU3804 working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It supports a maximum
of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W. It can work in UMTS mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a
BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6At a site using
BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based on the
frequency band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
WD5M85MRRU02 RRU V2 for Multi-Mode 850MHz RRU3908 V2, multimode RF module working at 850 MHz:
UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869 MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900
site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.B) or (Ver.C) cabinets: 6At a
site using BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L (Ver.D) cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based
on the frequency band requirements.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
GM6M85GRRU00 RRU3008 850MHz RRU3008 V1 working at 850 MHz: UL: 824 MHz to 849 MHz; DL: 869
MHz to 894 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to be configured is
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 73/239
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RRUs. RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station
This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 1900 MHz. RFUs Working at Band 2
(1900 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration. RFU configuration Model Description Function
Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle WD5M19MRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, andBTS3900L) WD5P19MRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit for multi-mode 1900 MHz A MRFU V1 working
at segment A of the 1900 M band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.
UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. BTS3900
cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured
is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of RFUs. WD5M19MRFU02 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
WD5P19MRFU02 (used for the BTS3900AL) RF Unit for multi-mode 1900 MHz B MRFU V1 working at segment
B of the 1900 M band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 1870
MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. BTS3900 cabinet,
BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 GM5M19GRFU00 (used for the BTS3900,
BTS3900A, and BTS3900L) GM5P19GRFU00 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU 1900 MHz A Multi-carrier RF
module working at segment A of the 1900 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output
power is 1x80 W. UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM mode. BTS3900
cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 The number of packages to be configured
is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of RFUs. GM5M19GRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
GM5P19GRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL) GRFU 1900 MHz B Multi-carrier RF module working at segment B
of the 1900 MHz band: The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W. UL: 1870
MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM mode. BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or
BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18 RRUs Working at Band 2 (1900 MHz)The following table lists the
RRU configuration. RRU configuration Model Description Function Maximum Quantity Configuration Principle
GM6M19GRRU00 RRU3008 1900 MHz A RRU3008 V1 working at the lower 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz
band: UL: 1850 MHz to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site:12 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output
power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. GM6M19GRRU01 RRU3008
1900 MHz B RRU3008 V1 working at the higher 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1870 MHz to 1910
MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12 The number of packages to
be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. WD5M19MRRU01 RRU for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz A
RRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the lower 40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1850 MHz
to 1890 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1970 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a
BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 Select this package based
on the frequency band requirements.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.The
number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
WD5M19MRRU02 RRU for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz B RRU3908 V1, multimode RF module working at the higher
40 MHz segment of the 1900 MHz band: UL: 1870 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1950 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work
in GSM, UMTE, or GU mode. QWEMRRU20300 RRU for WCDMA 1900 MHz (40 W) RRU3801E working at
1900 MHz: UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It supports a maximum of two carriers. The
maximum output power is 40 W. It can work in UMTS mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a
BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using
Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number
of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications
of RRUs. QWEMRRU20200 RRU for WCDMA 1900 MHz (60 W) RRU3804 working at 1900 MHz: UL: 1850
MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It supports a maximum of four carriers and its maximum output
power is 60 W. It can work in UMTS mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 74/239
BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.
WD5M19394200 RRU3942 for Multi-Mode 1900 MHz RRU3942 working at 1900 MHz: The module has two
transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W. It supports a maximum of
two sectors in 1T2R mode. UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHz It can work in GSM, UMTS,LTE, GU, GL, or UL mode. It supports four carriers and four antennas. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of packages to be configured is determined by
the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RRUs. WD5MJRUA820A RRU3936 Multi-Mode for 1900 MHz RRU3936, multimode blade RRU
working at the 1900 MHz full band:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80
W.UL: 1850 MHz to 1910 MHz; DL: 1930 MHz to 1990 MHzIt can work in GSM, UMTS, LTE, GU, GL, or UL
mode. At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9 The number of
packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For the
specifications, see .For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs. RF Modules Working
at Band 1 (2100 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF
modules working at 2100 MHz.RFUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)The following table lists the RFU
configuration.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration
PrincipleQWMMWRFUA100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFUA100 (used for
the BTS3900AL)WRFUa for WCDMA 2100MHz (1x100 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has
one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x100 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to
2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL
site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and
output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU8101 (used
for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU2100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUe for WCDMA
2100MHz (2x80 W)RF module working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum
output power is 2x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS
mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and
BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUd for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RF module
working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920
MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS or LTE mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A,
or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
QWMPWRFU6100 (used for the BTS3900AL)WRFUd for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RF module working at
2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980
MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet:
12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RFUs.QWMMWRFU8102 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU1101 (used for the
BTS3900AL)RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RF module working at the 2100 MHz frequency band
(enhanced module of the WRFU whose output power is 80 W):The module has one transmit channel and its maximum
output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS
mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to
be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU4100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and
BTS3900L)QWMPWRFU4100 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (40 W)RF module
working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x40 W.UL: 1920
MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 75/239
BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RFUs.QWMMWRFU8100 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
QWMPWRFU8100 (used for the BTS3900AL)RF Unit for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RF module working at 2100
MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz;DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzBTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12At a BTS3900AL site: 18The
number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.RRUs Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)
The following table lists the RRU configuration.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum
QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M21382400RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100MHz (60W)RRU3824, blade RRU
working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W.UL: 1920
MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C
site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined
by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21382401RRU3824 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)Enhanced RRU3824, blade
RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W.UL:
1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site:12At a
BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21382600RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RRU3826, blade
RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL:
1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site:12At a
BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21382601RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)Enhanced RRU3826, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80
W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At
a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21383200RRU3832 for Multi-Mode AWSRRU3832, blade RRU working
at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is
2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.The RRU3832
supports two receive channels in RAN12.0 and RAN13.0 and supports four carriers in RAN12.0.At a DBS3900 site:
12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured
is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications,
see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21383900RRU3839 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RRU3839,
blade RRU working at the 2100 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output
power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a
DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The
number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21383800RRU3838 for WCDMA
2100 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3838, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its
maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS
or LTE mode.The RRU3838 only supports four carriers in RAN12.0.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site:
1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L
using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the
number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 76/239
Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21382900RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x60 W)RRU3829 working at 2100
MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz;
DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.The RRU3829 only supports four carriers in RAN12.0.At
a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9At a BTS3900C site: 1The
number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.It supports a maximum of six UMTS
carriers and its total output power is 2x60 W.WD5M21MRRU00RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3828
working at 2100 MHz:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 1920
MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.The RRU3828 only supports four
carriers in RAN12.0.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using
Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site:
9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output
power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU10300RRU for
WCDMA 2100 MHz (40 W)RRU3801E working at 2100 MHz, which has entered the EOM phase:UL: 1920 MHz
to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt supports a maximum of two carriers. The maximum output power is
40 W.It can work in UMTS mode.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs.QWEMRRU10200RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)RRU3804 working at 2100 MHz, which has entered
the EOM phase:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt supports a maximum of four carriers.
The maximum output power is 60 W.It can work in UMTS mode.The number of packages to be configured is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU10700RRU for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)RRU3806 working at
2100 MHz, which has entered the EOM phase:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt supports
a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 80 W.It can work in UMTS mode.The number of packages
to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU10800RRU for WCDMA/LTE 2100 MHz (2x40
W)RRU3808 working at 2100 MHz:UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS
or LTE mode.The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers,and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs.WD5M21382601RRU3826 for WCDMA 2100 MHz (80 W)Enhanced RRU3826, blade RRU working at
2100 MHz:The module has one transmit channel and its maximum output power is 1x80 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980
MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a
BTS3900AL site: 9At a BTS3900C site: 1The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of
sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs.It supports a maximum of four UMTS carriers and its total output power is 80 W.WD5M21382401RRU3824
for WCDMA 2100 MHz (60 W)Enhanced RRU3824, blade RRU working at 2100 MHz:The module has one transmit
channel and its maximum output power is 1x60 W.UL: 1920 MHz to 1980 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2170 MHzIt
can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900 site:12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C
cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of
packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details
about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz) 2014
03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 7
(2600 MHz frequency band).RFUs Working at Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band)The following table lists RFU
configurations.RFU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration
PrincipleWD5M26LRFU0C (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P26LRFU0C (applying
to the BTS3900AL)RFU for LTE 2600M C (2x40W)LRFU working at segment C of the 2600 MHz frequency
band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2520 MHz;
DL: 2620 MHz to 2640 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet:
12BTS3900AL: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of
carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 77/239
RFUs.WD5M26LRFU0E (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)WD5P26LRFU0E (applying to
the BTS3900AL)RFU for LTE 2600M E (2x40W)LRFU working at segment E of the 2600 MHz frequency band:The
module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2550 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL:
2670 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.WD5M26LRFU00 (applying to the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and
BTS3900L)WD5P26LRFU00 (applying to the BTS3900AL)RFU for LTE 2600M D (2x40W)LRFU working atsegment D of the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power
is 2x40 W.UL: 2510 MHz to 2560 MHz; DL: 2630 MHz to 2680 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.RRUs Working at
Band 7 (2600 MHz Frequency Band)The following table lists RRU configurations.RRU
configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M26324000RRU3240
for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W,2T4R)RRU3240 working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:The module has two transmit
channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL:
2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L: 6BTS3900AL:
9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output
power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26LRRU0CRRU for LTE
2600M C (2x40W)RRU3201 working at segment C of the 2600 MHz frequency band:UL: 2500 MHz to 2520 MHz;
DL: 2620 MHz to 2640 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured
with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL:
9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output
power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26LRRU0DRRU for LTE
2600M D (2x40W)RRU3201 working at segment D of the 2600 MHz frequency band:UL: 2510 MHz to 2560 MHz;
DL: 2630 MHz to 2680 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured
with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL:
9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output
power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26LRRU0ERRU for LTE
2600M E (2x40W)RRU3201 working at segment E of the 2600 MHz frequency band:UL: 2550 MHz to 2570 MHz;
DL: 2670 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured
with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL:
9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M26LRRU68RRU for LTE
2600MHz (2x40W)RRU3268, blade RRU working at the 2600 MHz frequency band:Its maximum output power is
2x40 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured
with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of
sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs.WD5M26326000RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x40W,2T4R)RRU3260, blade RRU working at the 2600 MHz
frequency band:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is
2x40 W.UL: 2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/
BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured with Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L configured
with Ver.D cabinets: 9BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of
sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of
RRUs.WD5M26326200RRU for LTE 2600MHz (2x60W,2T4R)RRU3262 working at the 2600 MHz frequency
band:The module has two transmit channels and four receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL:
2500 MHz to 2570 MHz; DL: 2620 MHz to 2690 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900:18 (when the BBU is
installed in a rack)12 (when the BBU is installed in the APM30H)For details about the specifications, see Technical
Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section
describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4 (AWS).RFUs Working at Band 4 (AWS)The
following table lists the RFU configuration.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum
QuantityConfiguration PrincipleQCYMAWSRFU01 (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
QCYPAWSRFU01 (used for the BTS3900AL)CRFUd for LTE AWS (2x60 W)RF module working at the AWS
band:The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz;
DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet:
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 78/239
12BTS3900AL cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number
of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.RRUs
Working at Band 4 (AWS)The following table lists the RRU configuration.RRU
configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5MAW384100RRU for
LTE AWS (4T4R, 2x60W/4x30W)RRU3841 working at the AWS band:It works in 4T4R mode and providesmaximum output power of 2x60 W or 4x30 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can
work in LTE mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The
number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU40200RRU for WCDMA
AWS (60 W)RRU3804 working at the AWS band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt
supports a maximum of four carriers. The maximum output power is 60 W.It can work in UMTS mode.At a DBS3900
site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a
BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be
configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.QWEMRRU40800RRU for WCDMA/LTE AWS (2x40 W)
RRU3808 working at the AWS band:UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155 MHzIt can work in
UMTS, LTE, or UL mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site
using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL
site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and
output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M21383200RRU3832
for AWS (2x60 W)RRU3832, blade RRU working at the AWS bandThe module has two transmit channels and four
receive channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 1710 MHz to 1755 MHz; DL: 2110 MHz to 2155
MHzIt can work in UMTS, LTE, or UL SDR mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L
site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL
site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and
output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at
Band 12 (700 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF
modules working at band 12 (700 MHz frequency band).RRUs Working at Band 12 (700 MHz Frequency Band)The following table lists RRU configurations.RRU configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum
QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M07LRRU00RRU for LTE 700MHz (2x40W)RRU3203 working at band 12
(700 MHz frequency band):The module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL:
698 MHz to 716 MHz; DL: 728 MHz to 746 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.DBS3900: 12BTS3900/BTS3900A/
BTS3900L: 6BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors,
number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF
Modules Working at Band 13 (700 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station This section describes the principles
for configuring RF modules working at band 13 (700 MHz frequency band).RRUs Working at Band 13 (700 MHz
Frequency Band)The following table lists RRU configurations.RRU
configurationsModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M07LRRU01RRU for
LTE 700MHz (2x40W)RRU3201 working at band 13 (700 MHz frequency band):The module has two transmit
channels and its maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 776 MHz to 787 MHz; DL: 746 MHz to 757 MHzIt can
work in LTE mode.BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L: 6BTS3900AL: 9The number of packages to be configured is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.For details about the specifications, see
Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900 Series Base Station
This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at 800 MHz.RFUs Working at Band 20
(800 MHz)The following table lists the RFU configuration.RFU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum
QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M08LRFU0E (used for the BTS3900, BTS3900A, and BTS3900L)
WD5P08LRFU0E (used for the BTS3900AL)LRFU for LTE 800 M (2x60 W)LRFUe working at 800 MHz:The
module has two transmit channels and its maximum output power is 2x60 W.UL: 832 MHz to 862 MHz; DL: 791
MHz to 821 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.BTS3900 cabinet, BTS3900A, or BTS3900L cabinet: 12BTS3900AL
cabinet: 18The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and
output power. For details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RFUs.RRUs Working at Band 20
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 79/239
(800 MHz)The following table lists the RRU configuration.RRU configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum
QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5MD8LRRU0ARRU for LTE 800 MHz A (2x40 W)RRU3220 working at
segment A of the 800 MHz band:UL: 832 MHz to 847 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 806 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.At
a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900C site: 1At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets:
6At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5MD8LRRU0BRRU for LTE 800 MHz B (2x40 W)
RRU3220 working at segment B of the 800 MHz band:UL: 842 MHz to 862 MHz; DL: 801 MHz to 821 MHzIt can
work in LTE mode.WD5MD8LRRU00RRU for LTE 800 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3222 working at the 800 MHz
frequency band: UL: 832 MHz to 862 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 821 MHzIt can work in LTE
mode.WD5M08LRRU68RRU for LTE 800 MHz (2x40 W)RRU3268, blade RRU working at the 800 MHz full
band:The maximum output power is 2x40 W.UL: 832 MHz to 847 MHz; DL: 791 MHz to 806 MHzIt can work in
LTE mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site using Ver.B or Ver.C cabinets: 6At a
BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L using Ver.D cabinets: 9At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be
configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the
specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF Modules Working at Band 20 (800 MHz) 2014 03 26 3900
Series Base Station This section describes the principles for configuring RF modules working at band 4
(AWS).Configuration of RRUs Working at Band 28 (APT700)The following table lists the RRU configuration.RRU
configurationModelDescriptionFunctionMaximum QuantityConfiguration PrincipleWD5M07LRRU02RRU for
LTE APT700 (2T2R, 2x40 W)RRU3268 working at the APT700 frequency band: It works in 2T2R mode and
provides maximum output power of 2x40 W.UL: 703 MHz to 743 MHzDL: 758 MHz to 798 MHzIt can work in
LTE mode.At a DBS3900 site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number
of packages to be configured is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For
details about the specifications, see Technical Specifications of RRUs.WD5M07LRRU03RRU for LTE APT700
(2T2R, 2x40 W)RRU3268 working at the APT700 frequency band: It works in 2T2R mode and provides maximum
output power of 2x40 W.UL: 718 MHz to 748 MHzDL: 773 MHz to 803 MHzIt can work in LTE mode.At a DBS3900
site: 12At a BTS3900/BTS3900A/BTS3900L site: 6At a BTS3900AL site: 9The number of packages to be configured
is determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power. For details about the specifications,see Technical Specifications of RRUs.RF modules working at Band 28 (700 MHz APT)
4.3.1 AAU Configuration
This section describes the AAU configuration principles.
AAU3910 Configuration
This section describes the AAU3910 configuration principles.
RF Modules Working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 2 (1800
MHz).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 80/239
Table 4-45 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 2 (1800 MHz)
Model Description Function MaximumQuant
ity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD7M18MAA
U00
AAU3910
1800MHz
(2T2R, 2x63
dBm), 1710 to
1880 MHz (UL),
1920 to 2170
MHZ/2500 to
2690 (DL)
1.8 A (2T2R)+2.1/2.6 P:
l An RU3938 is used,
which is in 2T2R
mode and provides a
maximum output
power of 2x40 W.
l UL: 1710 to 1785
MHz, DL: 1805 to
1880 MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.
l It can provide a 4-
port broadband
antenna of 2100
MHz/2600 MHz for
external RRUs and
RFUs.
6 Each sector is
configured with
an AAU.
For carrier
power
specifications of
the RU3938, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3938.
RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)
The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2100
MHz).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 81/239
Table 4-46 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2100 MHz)
Model Description Function MaximumQuant
ity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD7M21WAA
U00
AAU3910 2100
MHz (2T4R,
2x65 dBm),
1920 MHz to
2170MHz (UL),
1710 MHz to
1880 MHz/2500
MHz to 2690
MHZ (DL)
2.1 A (2T4R)+1.8/2.6 P:
l An RU3832 is used,
which is in 2T4R
mode and provides a
maximum output
power of 2x60 W.
l UL: 1920 MHz to
1980 MHz, DL:
2110 MHz to 2170
MHz
l It can work in UMTS
mode.
l It can provide a 4-
port broadband
antenna of 1800
MHz/2600 MHz for
external RRUs and
RFUs.
6 Each sector is
configured with
an AAU.
For carrier
power
specifications of
the RU3832, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3832.
RF Modules Working at Band 1 (2600 MHz)
The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2600
MHz).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 82/239
Table 4-47 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 1 (2600 MHz)
Model Description Function MaximumQuant
ity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD7M26LAA
U00
AAU3910 2600
MHz (2T4R,
2x63 dBm),
2500 MHz to
2690MHz (UL),
1710 MHz to
2170MHZ (DL)
2.6 A (2T4R)+PCS/
1.8/2.1/AWS P:
l An RU3260 is used,
which is in 2T4R
mode and provides a
maximum output
power of 2x40 W.
l UL: 2500 MHz to
2570 MHz, DL:
2620 MHz to 2690MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.
l It can provide a 4-
port broadband
antenna of PCS/1800
MHz/2100 MHz/
AWS for external
RRUs and RFUs.
6 Each sector is
configured with
an AAU.
For carrier
power
specifications of
the RU3260, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3260.
WD7M26LAAU01
AAU3910 2600MHz (2T2R,
2x63 dBm),
2500 MHz to
2690MHz (UL),
1710 MHz to
2170MHZ (DL)
2.6 A (2T2R)+PCS/1.8/2.1/AWS P:
l An RU3268 is used,
which is in 2T4R
mode and provides a
maximum output
power of 2x40 W.
l UL: 2500 MHz to
2570 MHz, DL:
2620 MHz to 2690
MHz
l It can work in LTE
mode.
l It can provide a 4-
port broadband
antenna of PCS/1800
MHz/2100 MHz/
AWS for external
RRUs and RFUs.
6 Each sector isconfigured with
an AAU.
For carrier
power
specifications of
the RU3268, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3268.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 83/239
RF Modules Working at Band 4 (AWS)
The following table lists configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS).
Table 4-48 Configuration principles for RF modules working at Band 4 (AWS)
Model Description Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD7MAWSA
AU00
AAU3910
AWS (2T4R,
2x65dBm),
1710 - 1770
MHz/2110 -
2170 MHz
(UL), 1850 -
1990 MHz (DL)
AWS A(2T4R)
+PCS P:
l An RU3832
is used,
which is in
2T4R mode
and provides
a maximumoutput
power of
2x60 W.
l UL: 1710
MHz to 1755
MHz, DL:
2110 MHz to
2155 MHz
l It can work
in UMTS,
LTE, or ULmode.
l It can
provide a 4-
port antenna
of PCS for
external
RRUs or
RFUs.
6 Each sector is
configured with
an AAU.
For carrier
power
specifications of
the RU3832, see
technicalspecifications of
the RRU3832.
RF modules working at mixed frequency bands
RUs working at 1800 MHz, 2100 MHz, and 2600 MHz can form 2 A configurations (high-
frequency module in the upper slot and low-frequency module in the lower slot), as listed in the
following table.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 84/239
Table 4-49 Configuration principles for RF modules working at mixed frequency bands
Model Description Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD7MWMJAAU00
AAU3910 2100MHz+1800
MHz (2T4R,
2x65dBm,
2T2R,
2x63dBm),
1920 MHz to
2170 MHz
(UL), 1710
MHz to 1880
MHz/2500
MHz to 2690
MHz (DL)
2.1 A (2T4R) +1.8 A (2T2R)
An RU3938 is
used as a 1.8 A
RF module:
l It works in
2T2R mode
and provides
a maximum
output
power of
2x40 W.
l UL: 1710
MHz to 1880
MHz, DL:
1710 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work
in LTE
mode.
An RU3832 is
used as a 2.1 ARF module:
l The module
has two
transmit
channels and
four receive
channels and
its maximum
output
power is
2x60 W.l UL: 1920
MHz to 1980
MHz, DL:
2110 MHz to
2170 MHz
l It can work
in UMTS
mode.
6 Each sector isconfigured with
an AAU.
For carrier
power
specifications of
the RU3938 and
RU3832, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3938
and RRU3832.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 85/239
Model Description Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD7MWLJAA
U00
AAU3910 2600
MHz+2100MHz (2T4R,
2x63 dBm,
2T4R, 2x65
dBm), 2500
MHz to 2690
MHz (UL),
1710 MHz to
2170 MHz (DL)
2.6 A (2T4R) +
2.1 A (2T4R)An RU3832 is
used as a 2.1 A
RF module:
l The module
has two
transmit
channels and
four receive
channels and
its maximum
output power is
2x60 W.
l UL: 1920
MHz to 1980
MHz, DL:
2110 MHz to
2170 MHz
l It can work
in UMTS
mode.
An RU3260 is
used as the 2.6 A
RF module.
l It works in
2T4R mode
and provides
a maximum
output
power of
2x40 W.
l
UL: 2500MHz to 2570
MHz, DL:
2620 MHz to
2690 MHz
l It can work
in LTE
mode.
6 Each sector is
configured withan AAU.
For carrier
power
specifications of
the RU3832 and
RU3260, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3832
and RRU3260.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 86/239
Model Description Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD7MLMJAA
U00
AAU3910 2600
MHz+1800MHz (2T4R,
2x63 dBm,
2T2R, 2x63
dBm), 2500
MHz to 2690
MHz (UL),
1710 MHz to
2170 MHz (DL)
2.6 A (2T4R) +
1.8 A (2T2R)An RU3938 is
used as a 1.8 A
RF module:
l It works in
2T2R mode
and provides
a maximum
output
power of
2x40 W.
l UL: 1710MHz to 1880
MHz, DL:
1710 MHz to
1880 MHz
l It can work
in LTE
mode.
An RU3260 is
used as the 2.6 A
RF module.
l It works in
2T4R mode
and provides
a maximum
output
power of
2x40 W.
l UL: 2500
MHz to 2570
MHz, DL:
2620 MHz to2690 MHz
l It can work
in LTE
mode.
6 Each sector is
configured withan AAU.
For carrier
power
specifications of
the RU3938 and
RU3260, see
technical
specifications of
the RRU3938
and RRU3260.
AAU3902 Configuration
This section describes configuration principles and typical configurations of an AAU3902.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 87/239
AAU3902 Configuration Principles
The AAU3902 configuration principles are as follows:
l Each sector needs to be configured with an AAU3902. The number of RF modules is
determined by the number of sectors, number of carriers, and output power.
l The AAU3902 is an antenna with horizontal beamwidth of 65°, and therefore does not
apply to an omni-directional site.
l In sector splitting scenarios, the 4RXD mode (1T4R/2T4R/4T4R) is not supported.
Therefore, the configuration of six sectors is not supported.
l In non-sector-splitting scenarios:
– One AAU3902 supports a sector with horizontal beamwidth of 65°.
– An RU44-2.1Ga supports a maximum of eight 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R or 2T4R
carriers.
lIn sector splitting scenarios:– If a sector is split vertically, an AAU3902 supports two sectors, each with a horizontal
beamwidth of 65 degrees,
– and an RU44-2.1Ga supports a maximum of four 1T2R carriers or four 2T2R carriers.
It does not support 1T4R and 2T4R carriers.
l An AAU3902 with one active unit can be converted to support two active units. For
example,
– an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P
+(1710 to 2690) P configuration to support the 2100 A+1800 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710
to 2690) P configuration,
– or a 2600 MHz RU44 can be added to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration.
NOTE
a: In 4RX mode, the WBBPb and WBBPd only support small specifications, and they do not support CPRI
MUX. Therefore, the WBBPf is recommended for an RU44 of 2.1 GHz in 4RX mode.
Typical configurations of an AAU3902
The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902.
Table 4-50 Typical configurations of an AAU3902
Typical Configurations MU02 RU44-2.1G
RU44-1.8G
PU22
CU02
Supporting Version
2100 A+(790 to 960) P
+(1710 to 2690) P
1 1 0 1 1 SRAN8.0
2100 A+ 1800 A+ (790 to
960) P+ (1710 to 2690) P
1 1 1 1 0 SRAN9.0
1800 A+(790 to 960) P
+(1710 to 2690) P
1 0 1 1 0 SRAN9.0
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 88/239
The typical configuration of an AAU3902 is 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P. Its
package contains an RU44 of 2100 MHz. It can connect to a high-frequency RRU/RFU and a
low-frequency RRU/RFU. The following table lists the configurations.
Table 4-51 Principles for configuring an AAU3902
BOMCode
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
02310TJ
D
WD7MR44
M0200
2100 A
+(790 to
960) P
+(1710 to
2690) P
AAU3902
RU44-2100
MHz (2x63
dBm), 790
MHz to 960
MHz, 1710MHz to 2690
MHz
6 The number of
packages to be
configured is
determined by the
number of sectors,
number of carriers,and output power.
A package consists
of an AU02V, an
RU44-2.1G, an
MU02, a PU22,
and a CU.
Typical AAU3902 Conversion
An AAU3902 with one active unit can be converted to support two active units. For example,
an 1800 MHz RU44 can be added to an AAU3902 with the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to
2690) P configuration to convert the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+1800
A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) P configuration, or a 2600 MHz RU44can be added to convert
the AAU3902 so that the AAU3902 supports the 2100 A+2600 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to
2690) P configuration. The following figure shows the conversion. The following figure shows
the conversion.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 89/239
Figure 4-1 AAU3902 conversion
4.3.2 Power Module
This section describes configuration principles for the power modules used by 3900 series base
stations.
BTS3900
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 90/239
Table 4-52 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900
Model Description
Function MaximumQuant
ity
Configuration Principle
DCDU03B00
000
DC power
distribution
unit
A
DCDU-03B
provides
three 12 A
and six 20 A
DC power
outputs.
1 l Optional.
l The DCDU-03B provides
power for low-power RRUs. It
cannot provide power for high-
power RRUs, including
RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841,
RRU3961, RRU3832,
RRU3939, and RRU3839.
l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power outputs.
l Each DCDU can provide
power for a maximum of 6 DC
RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are
considered as one RRU.
DCDU11B00
000
DC power
distribution
unit
DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-11B). It
provides ten
25 A DC
power
inputs.
1 l Optional.
l The DCDU-11B is required in
a macro+distributed base
station.
l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A
power output ports, among
which six ports use big tool-
less female connectors (pressfit
type) and four ports use small
tool-less female connectors
(pressfit type).
l Each DCDU can provide
power for a maximum of 6 DC
RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are
considered as one RRU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 91/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
TD1MDCD
U12B0
DC power
distribution
unit
DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-12
B). This
module is
used in DC
cabinets and
provides ten
30 A circuit
breakers.
1 l Optional.
l The DCDU-12B is required in
a macro+distributed base
station.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers (using six
EPC5 connectors and four
EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
W0ACPSU0
0
PSU Module
(AC/DC),
30A
Power
supply
module,
used for
converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.
1 l It is optionally configured in
AC cabinets of Ver.B.
l In AC power supply scenarios,
the original power supply
system contains two PSUs.
When more than two PSUs are
required, one or more PSU
packages need to be
configured.
l Each package contains a PSU.
WPSU50A01 PSU Module
(AC/DC), 50
A
Power
supply
module,
used for
converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.
1 l It is optionally configured in
AC cabinets of Ver.C.
l The power supply capacity of a
PSU is 2900 W. The number of
PSUs to be configured depends
on the total power
consumption.
l In AC input scenarios, the
power system contains two
PSUs by default and a
maximum of one PSU can beadded to each single cabinet.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 92/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2MR485
0G00
PSU module
(AC/DC)
Power
supply
module,
used for
converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.
3 l It is optionally configured in
AC cabinets of Ver.D.
l The power supply capacity of a
PSU is 3000 W. The number of
PSUs to be configured depends
on the total power
consumption.
l In AC input scenarios, the
power equipment houses two
PSUs by default, and a
maximum of three PSUs can beadded to a cabinet.
W0DCPSU0
0
PSU Module
(DC/DC)
Power
module,
used for
converting
+24 V DC
power to -48
V DC
power.
2 l It is optionally configured in
Ver.B cabinets supplied with
+24 V DC power.
l In +24 V DC input scenarios,
the power equipment houses
two PSUs by default, and this
module needs to be configured
when more than two PSUs are
required. A maximum of two
PSUs can be added to a cabinet.
l Each package contains one
PSU.
WD2M000P
EU03
-48V Power
and
Environmen
t interface
Unit
UPEUc,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
360 W
power for
boards in aBBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUc is configured in a
BBU3900 by default. One
more UPEUc is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3900 is more
than 360 W or the BBU3900
requires power backup of less
than 360 W.
l The second UPEU occupies the
same slot as the UEIU. If this
UPEU is configured, the
default UEIU cannot be
configured for the BBU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 93/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00PE
IUD2
Power and
Environmen
t interface
Unit(-48V)
UPEUd,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
650 W
power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports
and applies
only to
BBU3910.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a
BBU3910 by default. One
more UPEUd is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3910 is more
than 650 W or the BBU3910
requires power backup of less
than 650 W.
l If a second UPEU, which
occupies the same slot as theUEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
BTS3900L
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 94/239
Table 4-53 Principles for configuring power modules in a BTS3900L
Model Description
Function MaximumQuant
ity
Configuration Principle
DCDU03B00
000
DC power
distribution
unit
A
DCDU-03B
provides
three 12 A
and six 20 A
DC power
outputs.
1 l Optional.
l The DCDU-03B provides
power for low-power RRUs. It
cannot provide power for high-
power RRUs, including
RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841,
RRU3961, RRU3832,
RRU3939, and RRU3839.
l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power outputs.
l Each DCDU can provide
power for a maximum of 6 DC
RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are
considered as one RRU.
DCDU11B00
000
DC power
distribution
unit
DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-11B). It provides
ten 25 A DC
power
inputs.
1 l Optional.
l The DCDU-11B is required in
a macro+distributed base
station.
l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A
power output ports, among
which six ports use big tool-
less female connectors (pressfit
type) and four ports use small
tool-less female connectors
(pressfit type).
l Each DCDU can provide
power for a maximum of 6 DC
RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are
considered as one RRU.
TD1MDCD
U12B0
DC power
distribution
unit
DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-12B
). It provides
ten 30 A
circuit
breakers.
1 l Optional.
l The DCDU-12B is required in
a macro+distributed base
station.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers (using six
EPC5 connectors and four
EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 95/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2MR485
0G00
PSU module
(AC/DC)
Power
supply
module,
used for
converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.
3 l It is optionally configured in
AC cabinets of Ver.D.
l The power supply capacity of a
PSU is 3000 W. The number of
PSUs to be configured depends
on the total power
consumption.
l In AC input scenarios, the
power equipment houses two
PSUs by default, and a
maximum of three PSUs can beadded to a cabinet.
WD2M000P
EU03
-48V Power
and
Environmen
t interface
Unit
UPEUc,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
360 W
power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUc is configured in a
BBU3900 by default. One
more UPEUc is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3900 is more
than 360 W or the BBU3900
requires power backup of less
than 360 W.
l If a second UPEU, which
occupies the same slot as the
UEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 96/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00PE
IUD2
Power and
Environmen
t interface
Unit(-48V)
UPEUd,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
650 W
power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm
ports.It
applies only
to the
BBU3910.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a
BBU3910 by default. One
more UPEUd is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3910 is more
than 650 W or the BBU3910
requires power backup of less
than 650 W.
l If a second UPEU, which
occupies the same slot as theUEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
BTS3900A
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 97/239
Table 4-54 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900A
Model Description
Function MaximumQuant
ity
Configuration Principle
DCDU03B00
000
DC power
distribution
unit
A
DCDU-03B
provides
three 12 A
and six 20 A
DC power
outputs.
1 l Optional.
l The DCDU-03B provides
power for low-power RRUs. It
cannot provide power for high-
power RRUs, including
RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841,
RRU3961, RRU3832,
RRU3939, and RRU3839.
l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A+3x12 A power outputs.
l Each DCDU can provide
power for a maximum of 6 DC
RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are
considered as one RRU.
DCDU11B00
000
DC power
distribution
unit
DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-11B). It
provides ten
25 A DC
power
inputs.
1 l Optional.
l The DCDU-11B is required in
a macro+distributed base
station.
l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A
power output ports, among
which six ports use big tool-
less female connectors (pressfit
type) and four ports use small
tool-less female connectors
(pressfit type).
l Each DCDU can provide
power for a maximum of 6 DC
RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are
considered as one RRU.
TD1MDCD
U12B0
DC power
distribution
unit
DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-12
B). It
provides ten
30 A circuit
breakers.
1 l Optional.
l The DCDU-12B is required in
a macro+distributed base
station.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers (using six
EPC5 connectors and four
EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 98/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
W0ACPSU0
0
PSU Module
(AC/DC), 30
A
Power
supply
module,
used for
converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.
A
maxim
um of
one
piece
can be
configu
red.
l It is optionally configured in
AC cabinets of Ver.B.
l In AC input scenarios, the
power system contains two
PSUs by default and a
maximum of one PSU can be
added to each single cabinet.
l A PSU provides a power
supply of 1600 W. The actual
configuration quantity depends
on the total power consumptionof the equipment. One
additional PSU is required at
sites where a diesel generator is
used.
WPSU50A01 PSU Module
(AC/DC), 50
A
Power
supply
module,
used for
converting
AC power to
-48 V DC power.
A
maxim
um of
one
piece
can be
configured.
l It is optionally configured in
AC cabinets of Ver.C.
l In AC input scenarios, the
power system contains two
PSUs by default and a
maximum of one PSU can be
added to each single cabinet.
l A PSU provides a power
supply of 2900 W. The actual
quantity to be configured
depends on the total power
consumption of the equipment.
One additional PSU is required
at sites where a diesel generator
is used.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 99/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2MR485
0G00
PSU module
(AC/DC)
Power
supply
module,
used for
converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.
A
maxim
um of
three
pieces
can be
configu
red.
l It is optionally configured in
AC cabinets of Ver.D.
l In AC input scenarios, the
power equipment houses two
PSUs by default, and a
maximum of three PSUs can be
added to a cabinet.
l A PSU provides a power
supply of 3000 W. The actual
quantity to be configured
depends on the total power consumption of the equipment.
Each AC cabinet is configured
with at least three PSUs
(including the two PSUs in the
original power system) at a site
where a diesel generator is
used.
WD2M000P
EU03
-48V Power
and
Environmen
t interfaceUnit
UPEUc,
power
module in
the BBU, providing
360 W
power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUc is configured in a
BBU3900 by default. One
more UPEUc is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3900 is more
than 360 W or the BBU3900
requires power backup of less
than 360 W.
l If a second UPEU, which
occupies the same slot as the
UEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 100/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00PE
IUD2
Power and
Environmen
t interface
Unit(-48V)
UPEUd,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
650 W
power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm
ports.It
applies only
to the
BBU3910.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a
BBU3910 by default. One
more UPEUd is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3910 is more
than 650 W or the BBU3910
requires power backup of less
than 650 W.
l If a second UPEU, which
occupies the same slot as theUEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
BTS3900AL
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 101/239
Table 4-55 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900AL
Model Description
Function MaximumQuant
ity
Configuration Principle
WD2P000PE
U00
Power and
Environmen
t interface
Unit (-48 V)
UPEUc,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
360 W
power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUc is configured in a
BBU3900 by default. One
more UPEUc is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3900 is more
than 360 W or the BBU3900
requires power backup of less
than 360 W.
l If a second UPEU, whichoccupies the same slot as the
UEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
WD2P00PE
UD00
Power and
Environmen
t interface
Unit (-48 V)
UPEUd,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
650 W power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports
and applies
only to
BBU3910.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a
BBU3910 by default. One
more UPEUd is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3910 is morethan 650 W or the BBU3910
requires power backup of less
than 650 W.
l If a second UPEU, which
occupies the same slot as the
UEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 102/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2MR485
0G00
PSU Module
(AC/DC), 50
A
Power
supply
module,
used for
converting
AC power to
-48 V DC
power.
A
maxim
um of
five
pieces
can be
configu
red.
l Optional components in the
AC cabinet
l The power supply capacity of a
PSU is 3000 W. The number of
PSUs to be configured depends
on the total power
consumption.
l In AC power supply scenarios,
the original power supply
system contains two PSUs, and
a maximum of five PSUs can be added to a cabinet.
l Each AC cabinet is configured
with at least three PSUs
(including the two PSUs in the
original power system) at a site
where a diesel generator is
used.
DCDU12BP
AC00
DC Power
Distribution
Unit (AC
Cabinet)
DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-12
B). This
module is
used in an
AC cabinet
and provides
ten 30 A
circuit
breakers.
2 l Optional.
l When a BTS3900AL AC
cabinet is configured with DCRRUs, a DCDU-12B is
required for every six DC
RRUs.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers (using six
EPC5 connectors and four
EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
DCDU12BP
DC00
DC Power
DistributionUnit (DC
Cabinet)
DC power
distribution box
(DCDU-12
B). It is used
in DC
cabinets and
provides ten
30 A circuit
breakers.
2 l Optional.
l When a BTS3900AL DCcabinet is configured with DC
RRUs, a DCDU-12B is
required for every six DC
RRUs.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers (using six
EPC5 connectors and four
EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 103/239
DBS3900
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900.
Table 4-56 Principles for configuring power modules in the DBS3900
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
DCDU03B00
000
DC power
distribution
unit
DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-03
B)
3 l Optional.
l The DCDU-03B can be used if
the site is not configured with
RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841,
RRU3961, RRU3832,RRU3939, or RRU3839.
l Each DCDU provides 6x20 A
+3x12 A power outputs.
l Each DCDU-03B can provide
power for a maximum of 6 DC
RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are
considered as one RRU.
DCDU11B00
000
DC power
distributionunit
DC power
distribution box
(DCDU-11
B). It
provides ten
25 A DC
power
outputs.
Each DCDU
supports a
maximum of
six groups of
power cables
for DC
RRUs.
3 l Optional.
l The DCDU-11B can be used if the site is configured with
RRU3829, RRU3929,
RRU3942, RRU3841,
RRU3961, RRU3832,
RRU3939, or RRU3839.
l Each DCDU supports ten 25 A
power output ports, among
which six ports use big tool-
less female connectors (pressfit
type) and four ports use small
tool-less female connectors(pressfit type).
l Each DCDU-11B can provide
power for a maximum of 6 DC
RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are
considered as one RRU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 104/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
TD1MDCD
U12B0
DC power
distribution
unit
DC power
distribution
box
(DCDU-12
B). Each
DCDU
provides ten
30 A circuit
breakers.
3 l Optional.
l Each DCDU-12B can provide
power for a maximum of 6 DC
RRUs. Two RRU3004
modules in the same sector are
considered as one RRU.
l Each DCDU provides ten 30 A
circuit breakers (using six
EPC5 connectors and four
EPC4 or EPC6 connectors).
WD5PMPW
80000
AC/DC
RRU power
module
AC/DC
RRU power
module
- l Optional.
l When an AC RRU consists of
an RRU3824/RRU3826/
RRU3929/RRU3926/
RRU3936/RRU3838/
RRU3832/RRU3260/
RRU3268/RRU3938/
RRU3939 and an AC/DC
module, this module must be
quoted. Each AC RRU is
configured with one of this
module.
l WD5PMPW80000 is replaced
by WD5PACDCPM00.
WD5PACDC
PM00
AC/DC
RRU power
module
AC/DC
power
module for a
blade RRU
-
WD2M000P
EU03
-48V Power
and
Environmen
t interface
Unit
UPEUc,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
360 W
power for
boards in aBBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUc is configured in a
BBU3900 by default. One
more UPEUc is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3900 is more
than 360 W or the BBU3900
requires power backup of lessthan 360 W.
l If a second UPEU, which
occupies the same slot as the
UEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 105/239
Model Description
Function MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2M00PE
IUD2
Power and
Environmen
t interface
Unit (-48 V)
UPEUd,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
650 W
power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports
and applies
only to
BBU3910.
2 l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a
BBU3910 by default. One
more UPEUd is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3910 is more
than 650 W or the BBU3910
requires power backup of less
than 650 W.
l If a second UPEU, which
occupies the same slot as theUEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
BTS3900C
The following table lists the principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 106/239
Table 4-57 Principles for configuring power modules in the BTS3900C
Model Description
Function MaximumQuant
ity
Configuration Principle
WD2P000PE
U01
-48V Power
and
Environmen
t interface
Unit
UPEUc,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
360 W
power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports.
1 l Optional.
l One UPEUc is configured in a
BBU3900 by default. One
more UPEUc is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3900 is more
than 360 W or the BBU3900
requires power backup of less
than 360 W.
l If a second UPEU, whichoccupies the same slot as the
UEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
WD2P00PE
UD01
Power and
Environmen
t interface
Unit (-48 V)
UPEUd,
power
module in
the BBU,
providing
650 W power for
boards in a
BBU. In
addition, it
provides
eight
external dry
contact
alarm ports
and applies
only to
BBU3910.
1 l Optional.
l One UPEUd is configured in a
BBU3910 by default. One
more UPEUd is required if the
total power consumption of
boards in the BBU3910 is morethan 650 W or the BBU3910
requires power backup of less
than 650 W.
l If a second UPEU, which
occupies the same slot as the
UEIU, is configured, the UEIU
does not need to be configured
in the BBU.
4.3.3 RET Module Configurations
The following table lists the configurations of an RET module.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 107/239
Table 4-58 Configurations of an RET module
ExternalModel
Description Function MaximumQuant
ity
ConfigurationPrinciple
GM5M00GAT
M00
Antenna and
TMA Control
Unit
RET antenna
and TMA
control module
GSM board
2 This module is
configured when
DRFUs have been
configured for GSM
mode and a TMA or
RET antenna is in use.
When DRFUs are
configured at a site and
the TMA function is
required, the GATM
must be configured.
Each GATM supplies
power to six BiasTees.
When DRFUs are
configured at a site and
the RET antenna is
required, the GATM
must be configured.
Each GATM supplies
power to three BiasTees.
NOTE
In GSM mode, a common TMA cannot be used with an RET antenna, because the overcurrent of RET
antenna adjustment will mistakenly cause a TMA alarm. GBSS12.0 supports a smart TMA which can be
used with an RET antenna.
4.3.4 Equipment and Product Auxiliary Material Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring the installation and site auxiliary materials.
Installation Auxiliary Materials
This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials used for installing
3900 series base stations.
Transmission Cables/Packages
The following table lists transmission cables and transmission packages for 3900series base
stations.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 108/239
Table 4-59 Installation auxiliary materials for 3900series base stations
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMP0004E100 Trunk Cable (75ohm, 4 E1, 10 m)
- l It needs to beconfigured when
75-ohm E1
transmission or
E1 line clock is
required.
l One piece is
configured for
every four E1s.
QWMP0004E101 Trunk Cable (120
ohm, 4 E1, 10 m)
- l It needs to be
configured when
120-ohm E1
transmission or
E1 line clock is
required.
l One piece is
configured for
every four E1s.
QWMP0000FE00 Ethernet Cable - l It needs to be
configured when
FE/GE electrical
ports are used.
l One piece is
configured for
every FE/GE.
LTIP000FBR00 Optical Fiber - l It needs to be
configured when
FE/GE optical
ports are used.
l One piece is
configured for
every FE/GE(only configured
for Ver.B or
Ver.C cabinets).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 109/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMP0000FE02 Optical Fiber (FE/
STM-1)
- l It needs to be
configured whenFE/
STM-1optical
ports are used.
l One piece is
configured for
every FE/STM-1
(only configured
for Ver.D
cabinets).
QWMP0000GE00 Optical Fiber(GE) - l It needs to be
configured when
GE optical ports
are used.
l One piece is
configured for
every GE (only
configured for
Ver.D cabinets).
Jumper Packages
The following table lists jumper packages for 3900series base stations.
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMP000JMP00 Top Jumper Cable
Unit for RFU
- l Each antenna is
configured with
one package
when the base
station uses
RFUs.
l The number of
packages is
determined by the
number of
antennas(1).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 110/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMP000JMP02 Top Jumper Cable
Unit for RRU
- l Each antenna in a
distributed basestation is
configured with
one package of
the jumpers,
which are used in
common areas.
l The number of
packages is
determined by the
number of
antennas(1)
.
QWMP000JMP03 Top Jumper Cable
Unit for RRU
- l Each antenna in a
distributed base
station is
configured with
one package of
the jumpers,
which are used in
cold areas.
l The number of
packages is
determined by the
number of
antennas(1).
NOTE
(1) When 4-way receive diversity is used, the number of antennas to be configured is twice of that used in
other scenarios.
Installation Packages for BBU Interconnection
The following table lists installation packages for BBU interconnection of 3900series base
stations.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 111/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD5PUCIUIM00 UCIU
InterconnectingMaterials (Internal
Cabinet)
1 Optional for the
BTS3900L/BTS3900AL. This
package is required
when BBUs are
interconnected using
UCIUs.
WD5PUCIUIM01 UCIU
Interconnecting
Materials (Internal
Cabinet)
1 Optional for the
BTS3900/
BTS3900A/
DBS3900. This
package is required
when BBUs areinterconnected using
UCIUs.
QWECUMPTIC02 UMPT
Interconnection
Cable, 2.0 m
1 Optional. This
package is required
for BBU
interconnection by
using the UMPTs.
This package is used
when two BBUs are
installed in the same
cabinet.
QWECUMPTIC05 UMPT
Interconnection
Cable, 5.0 m
1 Optional. This
package is required
for BBU
interconnection by
using the UMPTs.
This package is used
when the BBUs are
installed in different
cabinets.
RRU Virtual Installation Packages
The following table lists the RRU virtual installation packages.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 112/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMPRRUINS01 RRU Installation
Materials
- l Optional.
Differentauxiliary material
packages are
selected for
multimode and
single-mode fiber
optic cables.
l It is used for the
following RRUs:
RRU3004,
RRU3008,
RU3801E,
RRU3804,
RRU3806,
RRU3808,
RRU3201,
RRU3203,
RRU3220, and
RRU3222.
l Each RRU is
configured with
one package,
which includes
the RRU power
cable, RRU fiber
optical cable, and
CPRI optical
module.
QWMPRRUINS04 RRU Installation
Materials(Single
Mode)
-
QWMPRRUINS02 RRU Installation
Materials, B
- l Optional.
Different
auxiliary material
packages are
selected for
multimode andsingle-mode fiber
optic cables.
l These packages
are required for
the RRU3908/
RRU3928/
RRU3929/
RRU3828/
RRU3829/
RRU3926
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 113/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMPRRUINS05 RRU Installation
Materials(SingleMode)
- providing a 2.5
Gbit/s CPRI port.l Each RRU is
configured with
one package,
which includes
the RRU power
cable, RRU fiber
optical cable, and
CPRI optical
module.
QWMPRRUINS03 RRU Installation
Materials
- l Optional. A
maximum CPRI
data rate of 4.9
Gbit/s is
supported.
Different
auxiliary material
packages are
selected for
multimode and
single-mode fiber optic cables.
l Each RRU3240/
RRU3942/
RRU3841 is
configured with
one package.
l Each RRU other
than the
preceding is
configured with
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 114/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMPRRUINS06 RRU Installation
Materials(SingleMode)
- one package
when the RRUuses a 4.9 Gbit/s
CPRI data rate.
RRU Power Cable Installation Package
The following table lists the RRU power cable installation packages.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 115/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QW7PRRUCAP01 DBS3900, RRU
Cable Package (≤
50m)
1 l Optional. Each
DC RRU3936/RRU3824/
RRU3826/
RRU3838/
RRU3832/
RRU3268/
RRU3260/
RRU3938/
RRU3939/
RRU3839 is
configured with
one package,
which includes
DC RRU power
cables and PGND
cables.
l This package
applies to the
BTS3900/
BTS3900L/
BTS3900A/
DBS3900.
QW7PRRUCAP00 RRU Cable Package(≤ 100 m)
- l Optional. EachRRU is
configured with
one package.
l This package
applies to the
BTS3900AL.
QW7PAAUCAP01 RU Cable Package
for AAU (≤ 100 m)
- Optional. Each RU is
configured with one
package, which
includes the DC RU
power cable and
ground cable.
RRU CPRI Installation Material Package
The CPRI optical transmission material packages apply to an RRU3936/RRU3824/RRU3826/
RRU3838/RRU3832/RRU3268/RRU3260/RRU3938/RRU3939/RRU3839 and RU3260/
RU3268/RU3832.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 116/239
l The 2.5 Gbit/s or 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI installation material package is optionally configured
according to the application scenario and port rate of an RRU/RU.
l The multimode or single-mode material package is configured according to the type of the
CPRI fiber optic cable.
The following table lists the RRU CPRI installation material packages.
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD5P25CPRI02 DBS3900, CPRI
Optical
Transmission
Materials (2.5 Gbit/
s)
- l Optional. 2.5
Gbit/s CPRI
optical
transmission
material package
for RRUs.
l Each RRU CPRI port is configured
with one package
when the CPRI
port uses a 2.5
Gbit/s data rate.
This package applies
to a BTS3900/
BTS3900L/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900AL/
DBS3900.
WD5P25CPRI01 BTS3900AL, CPRI
Optical
Transmission
Materials (2.5 Gbit/
s) (Single Mode)
-
WD5P49CPRI02 DBS3900, CPRI
Optical
Transmission
Materials (4.9 Gbit/
s)
- l Optional. 4.9
Gbit/s CPRI
optical
transmission
material package
for RRUs.
l Each RRU CPRI
port is configured
with one package
when the CPRI
port uses a 4.9
Gbit/s data rate.
This package applies
to a BTS3900/
BTS3900L/
BTS3900A/
BTS3900AL/
DBS3900.
WD5P49CPRI01 BTS3900AL, CPRI
Optical
Transmission
Materials (4.9 Gbit/
s) (Single Mode)
-
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 117/239
AAU3902 Auxiliary Installation Materials
The following table lists the AAU3902 auxiliary installation materials.
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
QW7PAAUCAP00 AAU Power Cable
Package (≤ 100 m)
- One package is configured for
each AAU3902.
The quoted items include the
AAU3902 power cable and
ground cable.
WD5P49CPRI02 DBS3900, CPRI
Optical Transmission
Materials (4.9 Gbit/s)
- One package is configured for
each AAU3902 that uses
multimode optical modules.Each package includes one
fiber optic cable and two
optical modules, which support
a maximum rate of 4.9 Gbit/s.
WD5P49CPRI01 BTS3900AL, CPRI
Optical Transmission
Materials (4.9 Gbit/s)
(Single Mode)
- One package is configured for
each AAU3902 that uses
single-mode optical modules.
Each package includes one
fiber optic cable and two
optical modules, which supporta maximum rate of 4.9 Gbit/s.
Installation Materials for Lampsite
The following table lists the auxiliary material packages for Lampsite installation.
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
LT1PCOTMDC00 CPRI Optical
Transmission
Materials(Single-
mode, 9.8 Gbit/s)
- l Each RHUB3908 is
configured with one
package when it is
connected to the BBU or
another RHUB3908.
l This package includes two
optical modules and one
optical fiber cable.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 118/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
QWHENTCBIN00 Ethernet Cable(Indoor) - l
Each single-mode pRRU3901 is configured
with one package.
l For UL dual-mode
PRRU3901, one package is
configured for each
pRRU3901 when the LTE
carrier bandwidth
configured for the RRU
does not exceed 10 MHz but
two packages are
configured when the LTE
carrier bandwidth
configured for the RRU
exceeds 10 MHz.
l The package includes the
POE Ethernet cable and
installation package. The
longest Ethernet cable is
100 m.
Materials for a Base Station with an APM30 Ver.D Providing Power for 15 RRUs
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
QWMPODMINS00 ODM Installation
Materials
1 l One package is configured
for an outdoor DBS3900
configured with an APM30
Ver.D when the number of
RRUs is greater than 12.l This package includes one
ODM, one set of mount kit,
and installation auxiliaries.
l The maximum power
configuration of 15 RRUs is
as follows: 12RRUs (2x60
W)+3RRUs (2x40 W).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 119/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
QWMPOFDOFM00 OFD and OpticalFiber(Multi-mode) 1 l
One package is configuredfor an outdoor DBS3900
configured with an APM30
Ver.D when the number of
optical fiber cables
configured for RRUs is
greater than 21.
l This package includes one
OFD and one piece of 12-
core multimode optical
cable.
l This package is configuredwhen the multimode CPRI
optical fiber cable is
required.
QWMPOFDOFS00 OFD and Optical
Fiber(Single mode)
1 l One package is configured
for an outdoor DBS3900
configured with an APM30
Ver.D when the number of
optical fiber cables
configured for RRUs is
greater than 21.
l This package includes one
OFD and one piece of 12-
core multimode optical
cable.
l This package is configured
when the multimode CPRI
optical fiber cable is
required.
Site Installation Material Package
The following table lists the site installation packages.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 120/239
Table 4-60 Installation Material Package for a Macro Base Station
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD5P0INSMT00 InstallationMaterials for
BTS3900 Ver.B
1 l Optional. Siteinstallation
material package
for the BTS3900
(Ver.B).
l Each site must be
configured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-valueinstallation
materials.
QWMP0INSMT06 Installation
Materials for
BTS3900 Ver.C
1 l Optional. Site
installation
material package
for the BTS3900
(Ver.C).
l Each site must be
configured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
QWMP0INSMT20 Installation
Materials for
BTS3900 Ver.D
2 l Optional. Site
installation
material package
for the BTS3900
(Ver.D).l Each BTS3900
(Ver.D) site is
configured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 121/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMP0INSMT24 Installation
Materials for BTS3900 (Ver.D,
220 V)
2 l Optional. Site
installationmaterial package
for a BTS3900
(Ver.D) cabinet
of 220 V AC.
l Each BTS3900
(Ver.D) cabinet
of 220 V AC must
be configured
with one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
QWMP0INSMT05 Installation
Materials for
BTS3900L Ver.B
1 l Optional. Site
installation
material package
for the
BTS3900L
(Ver.B).
l EachBTS3900AL site
must be
configured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 122/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMP0INSMT07 Installation
Materials for BTS3900L Ver.C
1 l Optional. Site
installationmaterial package
for the
BTS3900L
(Ver.C).
l Each
BTS3900AL site
must be
configured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
QWMP0INSMT10 Installation
Materials for
BTS3900L Ver.D
1 l Optional.
Configured for
the BTS3900L
(Ver.D) cabinet.
l Each
BTS3900AL site
must beconfigured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 123/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMP0INSMT25 Installation
Materials for BTS3900L (Ver.D,
220 V)
1 l Optional. Site
installationmaterial package
for a BTS3900L
(Ver.D) cabinet
of 220 V AC.
l Each BTS3900L
(Ver.D) AC
cabinet must be
configured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
WD5P0INSMT01 Installation
Materials for
BTS3900A
1 l Optional.
Configured for
the BTS3900A
(Ver.C) cabinet.
l Each
BTS3900AL site
must beconfigured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 124/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMP0INSMT08 Installation
Materials for BTS3900A Ver.C
1 l Optional.
Configured for the BTS3900A
(Ver.C) cabinet.
l Each
BTS3900AL site
must be
configured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
QWMP0INSMT22 Installation
Materials for
BTS3900A (Ver.D,
-48VDC)
1 l Optional.
Configured for
the BTS3900A
(Ver.D) cabinet.
l Each
BTS3900AL site
must be
configured with
one package,which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
QWMP0INSMT23 Installation
Materials for
BTS3900A (Ver.D,
220 V/110 V AC)
1
WD5P0INSMT09 Installation
Materials for
BTS3900AL
1 l Optional.
Configured for
the BTS3900AL
cabinet.
l Each
BTS3900AL site
must be
configured with
one package,
which includes
the base,
auxiliary cables,
and low-value
installation
materials.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 125/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QWMP0INSMT03 Installation
Materials for DBS3900
1 Each site configured
with RFUs andRRUs needs to be
configured with one
package, which
includes the related
cables and low-value
installation auxiliary
materials.
Table 4-61 Site Installation Material Package for a DBS3900 Cabinet
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD5P0INSMT03 Installation Materials
for DBS3900
1 A site where a distributed base
station is deployed is
configured with one package,
which includes the auxiliary
cables and low-value
installation auxiliary materials.
QWMP0INSMT13 OMB CabinetInstallation Materials
(Ver.C, DC)
1 Optional. OMB Ver. C DCcabinet installation material
package. Each OMB Ver.C DC
cabinet is configured with one
package.
QWMP0INSMT09 OMB Cabinet
Installation Materials
(Ver.C, AC)
1 Optional. OMB Ver. C AC
cabinet installation material
package. Each OMB Ver.C AC
cabinet is configured with one
package.
Table 4-62 BTS3900C Installation Auxiliary
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0004E100 Trunk Cable (75
ohm, 4 E1, 10 m)
- It needs to be configured when
75-ohm E1 transmission or E1
line clock is required. Four E1s
are configured with one piece.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 126/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
QWMP0004E101 Trunk Cable (120ohm, 4 E1, 10 m) - It needs to be configured when120-ohm E1 transmission or E1
line clock is required. Four E1s
are configured with one piece.
QWMP0000FE00 Ethernet Cable - When the FE/GE electrical port
is used, each FE/GE is
configured with one piece.
QWMP0000FE02 Optical Fiber (FE/
STM-1)
- One piece is configured for
each FE/STM-1 optical port
when the FE/STM-1 optical
port is used. FE/STM-1 opticalfiber cables work with only
BTS3900C Ver.C cabinets.
QWMP0000GE00 Optical Fiber(GE) - One piece is configured for
each GE optical port when the
GE optical port is used. GE
optical fiber cables work with
only BTS3900C Ver.C
cabinets.
QWMP000JMP02 Top Jumper Cable
Unit for RRU
- Each antenna in a distributed
base station is configured with
one package of the jumpers,
which are used in common
areas.
In the case of 4-way RX
diversity or RRU working in
back-up mode, the number of
jumpers doubles.
QWMP000JMP03 Top Jumper Cable
Unit for RRU
- Each antenna in a distributed
base station is configured with
one package of the jumpers,
which are used in cold areas.
In the case of 4-way RX
diversity or RRU working in
back-up mode, the number of
jumpers doubles.
WD5P25CPRI10 CPRI Optical
Transmission
Materials (2.5 Gbit/s)
- Multimode optical
transmission material package
for RRUs with 2.5 Gbit/s CPRI
rate, which is optional. One
package is configured for each
2.5 Gbit/s CPRI port.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 127/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD5P49CPRI10 CPRI OpticalTransmission
Materials (4.9 Gbit/s)
- Multimode opticaltransmission material package
for RRUs with 4.9 Gbit/s CPRI
rate, which is optional. One
package is configured for each
4.9 Gbit/s CPRI port.
WD5PINSMTAC0 Installation Materials
for BTS3900C AC
Cabinet
1 Optional. Site installation
material package for a
BTS3900C AC cabinet. One
package must be configured for
each BTS3900C AC cabinet.
WD5PINSMTDC0 Installation Materials
for BTS3900C DC
Cabinet
1 Optional, site installation
material package for a
BTS3900C DC cabinet. One
package must be configured for
each BTS3900C DC cabinet.
Auxiliary Materials on the Site
This section describes the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on the sites of
3900series base stations.
BTS3900 or BTS3900L
The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials for a BTS3900 or
BTS3900L site.
Table 4-63 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900 or BTS3900L site
Model Description Maximum
Quantity
Configuration
PrincipleWD2DGPSSAF00 GPS Antenna 1 One package is
configured when a
GPS antenna is
required.
WD2DGPSSAF01 GPS Satellite
Antenna/Feeder
System
1 One package is
configured when the
required GPS feeder
is longer than 50 m
and is shorter than or
equal to 100 m.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 128/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
GM1X00IDDF01 Embedded DDF Box
(75 ohm, 8 E1)
- l If the 75 ohm
DDF needs to be provided by
Huawei, it is
recommended
that each indoor
site be configured
with one piece.
l Each package
supports 8E1s.
GM1X00IDDF02 Embedded DDF Box
(120 ohm, 8 E1)
- l If the 120 ohm
DDF needs to be
provided by
Huawei, it is
recommended
that each indoor
site be configured
with one piece.
l Each package
supports 8E1s.
QW7PRRUCEP02 RRU Cable
Extension Package
(50 m to 100 m)
- Optional. The
package is
configured when thedistance between the
BBU and RRUs is
longer than 50 m and
is shorter than 100 m.
Each RRU that meets
the condition is
configured with one
package.
QW7PRRUCEP03 RRU Cable
Extension Package
(100 m to 150 m)
- Optional. The
package is
configured when thedistance between the
BBU and RRUs is
longer than 100 m
and is shorter than
150 m. Each RRU
that meets the
condition is
configured with one
package.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 129/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
E000ICL00 Indoor Cable Ladder
(2.5 m)
- This package is
configured for sitedeployment
according to the
actual requirement.
WDCDBOX01 Outdoor Cable
Ladder (2.5 m)
- This package is
configured for site
deployment
according to the
actual requirement.
EFEDWID01 Thru-Wall
Encapsuled WiringWindow
l This package is
configured for site deployment
according to the
actual
requirement.
l A maximum of
one package can
be configured for
each site.
E000IGU00 Grounding Unit 2 l Each indoor site
is configured
with one ground bar. When the
antenna is
provided by
Huawei, each site
is configured
with two ground
bars.
l Optional. This
package is
configured
according to therequirements for
a new base
station. One
package is
configured for
each outdoor site
by default.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 130/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
GM1E00IEMU01 Embedded
EnvironmentMonitoring Unit
1 One piece is
configured for anindoor site where
there are 17 to 32
Boolean alarm
inputs.
QW7MEMUKIT01 Environment
Monitoring Unit
(with sensors)
1 l One piece is
configured if the
environment
(such as the liquid
level, smoke,
door status,
temperature, andhumidity) of the
equipment room
needs to be
monitored.
l It can support 32
Boolean alarm
inputs.
l GM1E00IEMU0
1 is not required
when this
package isconfigured.
GM1X0DNSPE01 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
1 Optional, UK-
specific. Configured
for a site where there
are 17 to 32 Boolean
alarm inputs.
The EMUA will be
replaced with the
EMUB later.
WD2M00EEUM01 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 131/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER01 Anti-Interference
Filter, Dual_band pass, RX: 824 to 849
MHz, TX: 869 to 894
MHz, 851 to 856
MHz, 856 to 860
MHz, 898.5 to 915
MHz, 0.9(824 to
846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB
(846.5 to 848 MHz),
1.9 dB(848 to 849
MHz), 0.9 dB(869 to
891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB
(891.5 to 894 MHz),
54 dB, double, DIN
female, Outdoor, DC
Pass
- l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 850 MHz
frequency.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
from the 800
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 132/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER02 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880
to 905 MHz, TX: 925
to 950 MHz, 869 to
878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1
dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
- l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX: 880
to 905 MHz, TX:
925 to 950 MHz.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna is
configured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 133/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER03 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 885
to 910 MHz, TX: 930
to 955 MHz, 869 to
883.5 MHz, RX: 2.1
dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
- l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX: 885
to 910 MHz, TX:
930 to 955 MHz.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna is
configured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 134/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER04 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890
to 915 MHz, TX: 935
to 960 MHz, 869 to
888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1
dB, TX:0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX:
895.8 to 915
MHz, TX: 940 to
960 MHz.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna is
configured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 135/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER05 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8
to 915 MHz, TX: 940
to 960MHz, 869 to
894 MHz, RX: 1.7
dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
- l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX:
895.8 to 915
MHz, TX: 940 to
960 MHz.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna is
configured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 136/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
ATMAKIT00 TMA(No AISG)
Auxiliary MaterialsKit (TMA not
included), GU
- l Auxiliary
installationmaterial package
for an anti-
interference
filter. An
auxiliary
installation
material package
must be
configured for
each anti-
interference
filter.
l If the filter is
provided by the
customer or
purchased
locally, this item
must be manually
removed from the
quotation list.
BTS3900A or BTS3900AL
The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials for a BTS3900A
or BTS3900AL site.
Table 4-64 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900A, BTS3900AL, or
BTS3900C site
Model Description Maximum
Quantity
Configuration
Principle
WD2DGPSSAF00 GPS Antenna 1 One package is
configured when a
GPS antenna is
required.
WD2DGPSSAF01 GPS Satellite
Antenna/Feeder
System
1 One package is
configured when the
required GPS feeder
is longer than 50 m
and is shorter than or
equal to 100 m.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 137/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QW7P00EDDF00 Embedded DDF Box
(75 ohm, 8 E1)
1 Optional. One
package isconfigured for a new
outdoor macro base
station.
E00EDDF02 Embedded DDF Box
(120 ohm, 8 E1)
1 Optional. One
package is
configured for a new
outdoor macro base
station.
QW7PRRUCEP02 RRU Cable
Extension Package(50 m to 100 m)
- Optional. The
package isconfigured when the
distance between the
BBU and RRUs is
longer than 50 m and
is shorter than 100 m.
Each RRU that meets
the condition is
configured with one
package.
QW7PRRUCEP03 RRU Cable
Extension Package(100 m to 150 m)
- Optional. The
package isconfigured when the
distance between the
BBU and RRUs is
longer than 100 m
and is shorter than
150 m. Each RRU
that meets the
condition is
configured with one
package.
WDCDBOX01 Outdoor CableLadder (2.5 m)
1 Optional. It isconfigured according
to the requirements
for a new distributed
base station.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 138/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
E000IGU00 Grounding Unit 1 Optional. This
package isconfigured according
to the requirements
for a new base
station. One package
is configured for
each outdoor site by
default.
GM5X00SLPU00 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit (1 to
16 Boolean Alarm)
1 It is configured for an
outdoor macro base
station that needs to
collect 1 to 16Boolean alarm
inputs.
WD2M00EEUM00 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
1 Optional.
Configured in an
outdoor macro base
station when 17 to 32
Boolean alarms are
required.
The EMUA will be
replaced with the
EMUB later.
GM1X0DNSPE00 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
1
GM1X0DNSPE01 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
1 Optional, UK-
specific. Configured
for a site where there
are 17 to 32 Boolean
alarm inputs.
The EMUA will be
replaced with the
EMUB later.
WD2M00EEUM01 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 139/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD2K000EIK01 Outdoor Adjusted
Plinth (Width 600mm)
- Outdoor Adjusted
Plinth (OAP600) for a cabinet used by the
BTS3900A, which is
optional. The
OAP600 is
configured in
outdoor scenarios
with rails. The
distance between
rails can be adjusted
from 535 mm to 750
mm.
By default, one
OAP600 is
configured for each
RFC, either a stacked
cabinet or a
standalone RFC.
WD2K000EIK02 Outdoor Adjusted
Plinth (Width 800
mm)
- Optional. OAP800,
used for installing a
BTS3900AL cabinet
on outdoor steel rails.
l The OAP800'swidth ranges
from 480 mm to
780 mm. Its depth
ranges from 500
mm to 750 mm.
l Each
BTS3900AL is
delivery with one
OAP800 by
default.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 140/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER01 Anti-Interference
Filter, Dual_band pass, RX: 824 to 849
MHz, TX: 869 to 894
MHz, 851 to 856
MHz, 856 to 860
MHz, 898.5 to 915
MHz, 0.9(824 to
846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB
(846.5 to 848 MHz),
1.9 dB(848 to 849
MHz), 0.9 dB(869 to
891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB
(891.5 to 894 MHz),
54 dB, double, DIN
female, Outdoor, DC
Pass
-l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 850MHz
frequency.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
from the 800
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 141/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER02 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880
to 905 MHz, TX: 925
to 950 MHz, 869 to
878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1
dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
-l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX: 880
to 905 MHz, TX:
925 to 950 MHz.
l It is used onlywhen the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna is
configured withone such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 142/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER03 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 885
to 910 MHz, TX: 930
to 955 MHz, 869 to
883.5 MHz, RX: 2.1
dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
-l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX: 885
to 910 MHz, TX:
930 to 955 MHz.
l It is used onlywhen the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna is
configured withone such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 143/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER04 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890
to 915 MHz, TX: 935
to 960 MHz, 869 to
888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1
dB, TX:0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX:
895.8 to 915
MHz, TX: 940 to
960 MHz.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna isconfigured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 144/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER05 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8
to 915 MHz, TX: 940
to 960MHz, 869 to
894 MHz, RX: 1.7
dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
-l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX:
895.8 to 915
MHz, TX: 940 to
960 MHz.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna isconfigured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 145/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
ATMAKIT00 TMA(No AISG)
Auxiliary MaterialsKit (TMA not
included), GU
-l Auxiliary
installationmaterial package
for an anti-
interference
filter. An
auxiliary
installation
material package
must be
configured for
each anti-
interference
filter.
l If the filter is
provided by the
customer or
purchased
locally, this item
must be manually
removed from the
quotation list.
DBS3900
The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900
site.
Table 4-65 Principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a DBS3900 site
Model Description Maximum
Quantity
Configuration
Principle
WD2DGPSSAF00 GPS Antenna 1 One package is
configured when a
GPS antenna is
required.
WD2DGPSSAF01 GPS Satellite
Antenna/Feeder
System
1 One package is
configured when the
required GPS feeder
is longer than 50 m
and is shorter than or
equal to 100 m.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 146/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QW7P00EDDF00 Embedded DDF Box
(75 ohm, 8 E1)
1 Optional. One
package isconfigured for each
newly deployed
distributed base
station.
E00EDDF02 Embedded DDF Box
(120 ohm, 8 E1)
1 Optional. One
package is
configured for each
newly deployed
distributed base
station.
E000IGU00 Grounding Unit 2 l Each indoor site
is configured
with one ground
bar. When the
antenna is
provided by
Huawei, each site
is configured
with two ground
bars.
l Each site is
configured with
one or two pieces
if needed.
QW7PRRUCEP02 RRU Cable
Extension Package
(50 m to 100 m)
- Optional. The
package is
configured when the
distance between the
BBU and RRUs is
longer than 50 m and
is shorter than 100 m.
Each RRU that meetsthe condition is
configured with one
package.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 147/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
QW7PRRUCEP03 RRU Cable
Extension Package(100 m to 150 m)
- Optional. The
package isconfigured when the
distance between the
BBU and RRUs is
longer than 100 m
and is shorter than
150 m. Each RRU
that meets the
condition is
configured with one
package.
E000ICL00 Indoor Cable Ladder (2.5 m)
- Optional. The package is
configured as
required if the BBU
is installed indoors in
a new distributed
base station.
WDCDBOX01 Outdoor Cable
Ladder (2.5 m)
- Optional. It is
configured according
to the requirements
for a new distributed
base station.
GM5X00SLPU00 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit (1 to
16 Boolean Alarm)
1 It is optionally
configured for a
distributed base
station when the
BBU is installed
outdoors and there
are 1 to 16 Boolean
alarm inputs.
WD2M00EEUM00 Embedded
EnvironmentMonitoring Unit
1 It is optionally
configured when theBBU is installed
outdoors in a
distributed base
station and 16 to 32
Boolean inputs need
be monitored. It is
also optional
configured when 1 to
16 Boolean inputs
need be monitored
for a +24 V
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 148/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
GM1X0DNSPE00 Embedded
EnvironmentMonitoring Unit
1 distributed base
station.The EMUA will be
replaced with the
EMUB later.
QW7MEEMUKIT0 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
(with sensors)
1 Optional.
Configured when the
BBU is installed
indoors and the
environment (such as
the liquid level,
smoke, door status,
and temperature and
humidity) in the
equipment roomneeds to be
monitored.
It can support 32
Boolean alarm
inputs.
The EMUA will be
replaced with the
EMUB later.
QW1XEMEUWS00 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
(with sensors)
1
GM1X0DNSPE01 Embedded
EnvironmentMonitoring Unit
1 Optional, UK-
specific. Configuredfor a site where there
are 17 to 32 Boolean
alarm inputs.
The EMUA will be
replaced with the
EMUB later.
WD2M00EEUM01 Embedded
Environment
Monitoring Unit
1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 149/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER01 Anti-Interference
Filter, Dual_band pass, RX: 824 to 849
MHz, TX: 869 to 894
MHz, 851 to 856
MHz, 856 to 860
MHz, 898.5 to 915
MHz, 0.9(824 to
846.5 MHz), 1.2 dB
(846.5 to 848 MHz),
1.9 dB(848 to 849
MHz), 0.9 dB(869 to
891.5 MHz), 1.2 dB
(891.5 to 894 MHz),
54 dB, double, DIN
female, Outdoor, DC
Pass
-l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 850MHz
frequency.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
from the 800
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of antenna is
configured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 150/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER02 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 880
to 905 MHz, TX: 925
to 950 MHz, 869 to
878.5 MHz, RX: 2.1
dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
-l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX: 880
to 905 MHz, TX:
925 to 950 MHz.
l It is used onlywhen the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna is
configured withone such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 151/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER03 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 885
to 910 MHz, TX: 930
to 955 MHz, 869 to
883.5 MHz, RX: 2.1
dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
-l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX: 885
to 910 MHz, TX:
930 to 955 MHz.
l It is used onlywhen the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna is
configured withone such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 152/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER04 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 890
to 915 MHz, TX: 935
to 960 MHz, 869 to
888.5 MHz, RX: 2.1
dB, TX:0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX:
895.8 to 915
MHz, TX: 940 to
960 MHz.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna isconfigured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 153/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
AANTIFLTER05 Anti-Interference
Filter, dual_band pass filter, RX: 895.8
to 915 MHz, TX: 940
to 960MHz, 869 to
894 MHz, RX: 1.7
dB, TX: 0.4 dB, 40
dB, double unit, 7/16
DIN female,
Outdoor, DC Pass
-l This filter applies
only to a basestation working at
the 900 MHz
frequency. It is
used when the
carriers of a base
station are
configured as
follows: RX:
895.8 to 915
MHz, TX: 940 to
960 MHz.
l It is used only
when the field
RNP personnel
find interference
of CDMA, GSM
or UMTS signals
from the 850
MHz iDEN band.
l It is a dual-unit
filter. Each set of
antenna isconfigured with
one such filter,
and a sector with
four antennas is
configured with
two such filters.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 154/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
ATMAKIT00 TMA(No AISG)
Auxiliary MaterialsKit (TMA not
included), GU
-l Auxiliary
installationmaterial package
for an anti-
interference
filter. An
auxiliary
installation
material package
must be
configured for
each anti-
interference
filter.
l If the filter is
provided by the
customer or
purchased
locally, this item
must be manually
removed from the
quotation list.
BTS3900C
The following table lists the principles for configuring the auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C
site.
Table 4-66 Auxiliary materials on a BTS3900C site
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
E000IGU00 Grounding Unit 1 Optional. This package is
configured according to the
requirements for a new base
station. One package is
configured for each outdoor
site by default.
WD2DGPSSAF00 GPS Satellite
Antenna/Feeder
System
1 One package is configured
when a GPS antenna is
required.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 155/239
Model Description MaximumQuantity
Configuration Principle
WD2DGPSSAF01 GPS SatelliteAntenna/Feeder
System
1 One package is configuredwhen the required GPS feeder
is longer than 50 m and is
shorter than or equal to 100 m.
4.3.5 Hardware License Configuration
This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for each type of base
station.
Hardware License Configuration of GSM Base Stations
This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base
stations.
The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for GSM base
stations.
Table 4-67 Hardware license configuration for GSM base stations
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
GMMS0
DRFUT0
0
3900 series
DRFU
transceiver
(per TRX)
License for the
TRX of a DRFU
in GSM mode
Each DRFU provides one TRX by default. One
license is configured for each excess TRX.
It applies to DRFUs.
GMMS0
GRFUT0
0
3900 series
GRFU
transceiver
(per TRX)
License for
providing
multiple TRXs
for a GRFU
Each GRFU provides one TRX by default. One
license is configured for each excess TRX.
It applies to GRFUs.
WDMS
MULTIT
00
GSM
multiple
transceiver
for the 2nd
TRX of
multimode
module
License for the
second GSM
TRX of a
multimode RF
module
Each multimode RF module provides one
GSM TRX by default. To enable a multimode
RF module to provide two GSM TRXs, the
module needs to be configured with one
license.
It applies to multimode RFUs and RRUs.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 156/239
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
WDMS
MULTIT
01
GSM
multiple
transceiver
for
multimode
module
License for
multiple GSM
TRXs of a
multimode RF
module
When a multimode module is configured with
more than two GSM TRXs, the number of
licenses to be configured for the module is the
total number of GSM TRXs configured for the
module minus 2.
This license applies to multimode RFUs and
RRUs.
GMMS0
DRRUT0
0
3900 series
RRU3004
transceiver
(per TRX)
RRU3004 dual
transceiver
license
Each RRU3004 supports one TRX by default.
An RRU3004 that supports two carriers
requires a double-transceiver license.
GMMS0
GRRUT0
0
3900 series
RRU3008
transceiver
(per TRX)
RRU3008 multi-
TRX license
Each RRU3008 supports one TRX by default.
The number of multi-TRX licenses is one less
than the number of TRXs supported by an
RRU3008.
WDMS
MULTIT
00
GSM
multiple
transceiver
for the 2nd
TRX of
multimodemodule
License for the
second GSM
TRX of a
multimode RF
module
Each multimode RF module provides one
GSM TRX by default. To enable a multimode
RF module to provide two GSM TRXs, the
module needs to be configured with one
license.
It applies to multimode RRUs.
WDMS
MULTIT
01
GSM
multiple
transceiver
for
multimode
module
License for
multiple GSM
TRXs of a
multimode RF
module
This license is configured when a multimode
module is configured with more than two GSM
TRXs. The number of licenses to be
configured for the module is the total number
of GSM TRXs configured for the module
minus 2.
This license applies to multimode RRUs.
GMMSM
C60HP00
Multi
Carrier 60
W High
Power
License
(per TRX)
Each TRX of a
multi-carrier
module supports
60 W transmit
power.
One package is configured for each GSM
carrier whose transmit power is greater than or
equal to 60 W and is smaller than 80 W.
For the RF module where the transmit power
of each channel is greater than or equal to 60
W, the Multi Carrier 60 W High Power License
is supported.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 157/239
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
GMMSM
C80HP00
Multi
Carrier 80
W High
Power
License
(per TRX)
Each TRX of a
multi-carrier
module supports
80 W transmit
power.
One package is configured for each GSM
carrier whose transmit power is greater than or
equal to 80 W. This package does not contain
the license package of Multi Carrier 60 W High
Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX).
For the RF module where the transmit power
of each channel is greater than or equal to 80
W, the Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License
is supported.
WDMS
MULTIT03
GSM
MultipleTransceiver
for the 2nd
TRX of
Multi-
Mode
Blade&AA
U
License for the
second GSMTRX of a
multimode RF
module (AAU or
blade RRU)
Each multimode RF module provides one
GSM TRX by default. To enable a multimodeRF module to provide two GSM TRXs, the
module needs to be configured with one
license.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade
RRU.
WDMS
MULTIT
02
GSM
Multiple
Transceiver
for Multi-
Mode
Blade&AA
U
License for
multiple GSM
TRXs of a
multimode RF
module (AAU or
blade RRU)
This license is configured when a multimode
module is configured with more than two GSM
TRXs. The number of licenses to be
configured for the module is two less than the
total number of GSM TRXs configured for the
module.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade
RRU.
GMMSM
C60HP01
Multi
Carrier 60
W High
Power
License for
Blade&AAU (per
TRX)
Each TRX of a
multi-TRX
module (AAU or
blade RRU)
supports 60 W
transmit power.
One package is configured for each GSM
carrier whose transmit power is greater than or
equal to 60 W and is smaller than 80 W.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade
RRU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 158/239
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
GMMSM
C80HP01
Multi
Carrier 80
W High
Power
License for
Blade&AA
U (per
TRX)
Each TRX of a
multi-TRX
module (AAU or
blade RRU)
supports 80 W
transmit power.
One package is configured for each GSM
carrier whose transmit power is greater than or
equal to 80 W. This package does not contain
the license package of Multi Carrier 60 W High
Power License for Blade&AAU (per TRX).
For the RF module where the transmit power
of each channel is greater than or equal to 80
W, the Multi Carrier 80 W High Power License
is supported.
This license applies only to AAUs and blade
RRUs.
Hardware License Configuration of UMTS Base Stations
This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base
stations.
The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for UMTS base
stations.
Table 4-68 Hardware license configuration of UMTS base stations
Model LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
QWMS00
0UCE01
UL CE
License for 0
CEs to 64
CEs (per 16
CEs)
This license is
configured for
the UMTS
mode. It is
used for uplink
CEs andquoted in a
step-wise
manner.
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum
four licenses can be configured.
l It is configured when less than or equal to
64 CEs are required.
l Four licenses are configured when more
than 64 CEs are required.
QWMS00
0UCE02
UL CE
License for
64 CEs to 128
CEs (per 16
CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum
four licenses can be configured.
It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs.
QWMS00
0UCE03
UL CE
License for
128 CEs to
192 CEs (per
16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum
four licenses can be configured.
It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 159/239
Model LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
QWMS000UCE04 UL CELicense for
more than
192 CEs (per
16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximumfour licenses can be configured.
It is configured when more than 192 CEs are
required.
QWMS00
0DCE01
DL CE
License for 0
CEs to 64
CEs (per 16
CEs)
This license is
configured for
the UMTS
mode. It is
used for
downlink CEs
and quoted in astep-wise
manner.
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum
four licenses can be configured.
l It is configured when less than or equal to
64 CEs are required.
l Four licenses are configured when more
than 64 CEs are required.
QWMS00
0DCE02
DL CE
License for
64 CEs to 128
CEs (per 16
CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum
four licenses can be configured.
It is configured for the 65th to 128th CEs.
QWMS00
0DCE03
DL CE
License for
128 CEs to
192 CEs (per
16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum
four licenses can be configured.
It is configured for the 129th to 192nd CEs.
QWMS00
0DCE04
DL CE
License for
more than
192 CEs (per
16 CEs)
Each license supports 16 CEs. A maximum
four licenses can be configured.
It is configured when more than 192 CEs are
required.
QWMS0H
DPAC00
HSDPA
Code (per
Code)
HSDPA code
resources
This is a mandatory HSDPA function item.
This item must be configured based on the
quantity of the HSDPA code resources
required by the base station.
Each package is one HSDPA code. Theminimum configuration is five HSDPA
codes. For a base station, the maximum
number of HSDPA codes that can be
configured equals the number of cells carried
by the base station multiplied by 15.
The number of HSDPA codes required by a
base station must be a multiple of 5.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 160/239
Model LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
QWMS000MCA00 Multi Carrier License (per
Carrier)
Multi-carrier function for
the UMTS
mode
A license for one carrier is included in thehardware quotation for each RF module of
the base station. When the module has more
than one carrier, one package needs to be
configured for each excess carrier.
This license applies to the WRFU, WRFUd,
and RRU in UMTS mode.
QWMS00
00PA00
Power
License (per
20 W)
License
package for 20
W power
A license for 20 W power is included in the
hardware quotation for each RF module of
the base station. When the power exceeds 20
W, one package needs to be configured for
each excess part of 20 W power.
WDMS00
0MCA00
WCDMA
Multi Carrier
License for
the 1st
Carrier of
Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)
License for the
first carrier of
the UMTS
mode in a
multimode RF
module
The quotation of a multimode RF module
does not include a license for UMTS carriers.
Therefore, one license is configured for the
first UMTS carrier of each module.
This license applies to multimode RF
modules.
WDMS00
0MCA01
WCDMA
Multi Carrier License for
Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)
License for
multipleUMTS carriers
of a multimode
RF module
The quotation of a multimode RF module
does not include a license for UMTS carriers.Therefore, one license is configured for each
of the second to fourth UMTS carriers of
each module.
This license applies to multimode RF
modules.
QWMS00
UNSC00
UMTS
NodeB
Signaling
Capacity
License (per 50 CNBAP/s)
UMTS
signaling
capacity
license
It is configured when the signaling capacity
of a base station exceeds 350 CNBAP/s.
Each license contains a signaling capacity of
50 CNBAP/s.
This license is supported from SRAN7.0/RAN14.0 onwards.
QWMS00
0MCA01
Multi Carrier
License for
Blade&AAU
(per Carrier)
Multi-carrier
function for
the UMTS
mode of an
AAU or blade
RRU
A license for one carrier is included in the
hardware quotation for each RF module of
the base station. When the module has more
than one carrier, one package needs to be
configured for each excess carrier.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade
RRU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 161/239
Model LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
QWMS0000PA01 Power License for
Blade&AAU
(per 20 W)
License package for 20
W power of an
AAU or blade
RRU
A license for 20 W power is included in thehardware quotation for each RF module of
the base station. When the power exceeds 20
W, one package needs to be configured for
each excess part of 20 W power.
This license applies to an AAU or a blade
RRU.
WDMS00
0MCA03
WCDMA
Multi Carrier
License for
the 1st
Carrier of Multi-Mode
Blade&AAU
(per Carrier)
License for the
first UMTS
carrier of a
multimode RF
module (AAUor blade RRU)
The license package for each UMTS carrier
is not included in a multimode module, but
configured for the first UMTS carrier of each
multimode module. One license is required
for each UMTS carrier.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or
a blade RRU.
WDMS00
0MCA02
WCDMA
Multi Carrier
License for
Multi-Mode
Blade&AAU
(per Carrier)
License for
multiple
UMTS carriers
of a multimode
RF module
(AAU or blade
RRU)
The license package for each UMTS carrier
is not included in a multimode module. It is
configured for the second to fourth carriers
for each multimode module. One license is
required for each UMTS carrier.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or
a blade RRU.
Hardware License Configuration of LTE Base Stations
This section describes the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base stations.
The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for LTE base
stations.
Table 4-69 Hardware license configuration for LTE base stations
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
LT1S000
0PA00
RF Output
Power (per
20 W)
Power license
package for
RF modules
A license for 20 W power is included in the
hardware quotation for each RF module of the
base station. When the power exceeds 20 W,
one package needs to be configured for each
excess part of 20 W power.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 162/239
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
LT1S000
MCA00
LTE Multi
Carrier (per
Carrier)
Multi-carrier
license
package for
RF modules
The quotation for each RF module includes one
carrier by default. When more than one carrier
is used by an RF module, one package is
configured for every additional carrier.
It applies to RF modules with multiple carriers.
LT1S005
MHZ00
Carrier
Bandwidth -
0 MHz to 5
MHz
Capacity
Carrier
Bandwidth
licence (per
cell) for RF
modules
l When a cell uses less than or equal to 5 MHz
bandwidth, one license is configured for the
cell.
l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
This license applies to multimode RFUs and
RRUs.
LT1S010
MHZ00
Carrier
Bandwidth -
5 MHz to 10
MHz
Carrier
bandwidth
licence (per
cell) for RFmodules
l When a cell uses 10 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
This license applies to multimode RFUs and
RRUs.
LT1S015
MHZ00
Carrier
Bandwidth -
10 MHz to
15 MHz
Carrier
bandwidth
licence (per
cell) for RF
modules
l When a cell uses 15 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
l When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
LT1S020
MHZ00
Carrier
Bandwidth -
15 MHz to
20 MHz
Carrier
bandwidth
licence (per
cell) for RF
modules
When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 163/239
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
LT1S0AC
TUS00
RRC
connected
User
License for the
baseband
processing
capacity of
RRC_connect
ed users (per
RRC_connect
ed user)
This package is configured based on the
network plan. Each cell is configured with the
licenses for a minimum of 6 RRC_connected
users, and the number of RRC_connected users
increases with a step of 6. A maximum of 5400
RRC_connected users are allowed.
For example, a S1/1/1 base station is configured
with a minimum of 18 (equal to 3x6)
RRC_connected users.
LT1S0TH
ROU00
Throughput
Capacity
License for the
throughputcapacity of the
baseband
processing
module (per
Mbit/s)
This package is configured based on the
network plan. Each cell is configured with aminimum of 5 Mbit/s, and the capacity
increases with a step of 5 Mbit/s. The maximum
capacity is 750 Mbit/s.
For example, a S1/1/1 base station is configured
with a minimum of 15 Mbit/s (equal to 3 x 5
Mbit/s).
LT1S000
0RB00
Resource
Block
Resource
Block (per
RB)
Assume that N specifies the number of required
packages per cell. The total number of packages
equals N multiplied by the number of cells. N
is determined by the cell bandwidth as follows:l 1.4 MHz: N is 6.
l 3 MHz: N is 15.
l 5 MHz: N is 25.
l 10 MHz: N is 50.
l 15 MHz: N is 75.
l 20 MHz: N is 100.
In multi-carrier scenarios, the number of
required packages is calculated on a per-carrier
basis. The total number of packages is the sumof the calculation results.
This package applies only to the LBBPd.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 164/239
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
LT1S00B
BTC00
BB
Transmit
Channel
BB Transmit
Channel (per
Channel)
This package is configured when the LBBPd2
requires more than two transmit channels. The
quotation for an LBBPd2 includes two transmit
channels per cell. When the number of transmit
channels exceeds 2, one package is required for
each transmit channel added. The number of
required packages is calculated using the
following formula:
Number of packages required for one LBBPd2
= Number of sectors with more than two
transmit channels x (Number of transmit
channels - 2) x Number of carriers
This license only applies to the LBBPc,
LBBPd2, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
LT1S00B
BRC00
BB Receive
Channel
BB Receive
Channel (per
Channel)
This package is configured when the LBBPd2
requires more than two transmit channels. Each
baseband board has been configured with two
receive channels per cell. Therefore, one
package is required for every receive channel
added. The number of required packages is
calculated using the following formula:
Number of packages required for one LBBPd2
= Number of sectors with more than two receive
channels x (Number of receive channels - 2) x
Number of carriers
This license only applies to the LBBPc,
LBBPd2, UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
LT1S00R
FTC00
RF
Transmit
Channel
RF Transmit
Channel(per
Channel)
This package is required when the RF module
has more than two RF receive channels.
Each RF module has two RF transmit channels.
Add this package for each extra RF transmit
channel of an RF module.
This package applies only to the RF modules
with four transmit channels (4T RF modules).
The number of licenses to be configured is
calculated by the following formula: Number of
licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs
with more than two transmit channels x
(Number of transmit channels of a single RRU
- 2)
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 165/239
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
LT1S00R
FRC00
RF Receive
Channel
RF Receive
Channel (per
Channel)
This package is required when the RF module
has more than two RF receive channels.
Each RF module has two RF receive channels.
Add this package for each extra RF receive
channel on an RF module.
This package applies only to the RF modules
with four receive channels (4R RF modules).
The number of licenses to be configured is
calculated by the following formula: Number of
licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs
with more than two receive channels x (Number of receive channels of a single RRU - 2)
LT1S000
0PA01
RF Output
Power
Blade&AA
U (per 20
W)
Power license
package for an
AAU or blade
RRU
A license for 20 W power is included in the
hardware quotation for each RF module of the
base station. When the power exceeds 20 W,
one package needs to be configured for each
excess part of 20 W power.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a
blade RRU.
LT1S000
MCA01
RF multi
carrier for blade&AA
U (per
carrier)
Multi-carrier
license package for an
AAU or blade
RRU
The quotation for each RF module includes one
carrier by default. When more than one carrier is used by an RF module, one package is
configured for every additional carrier.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a
blade RRU.
LT1S005
MHZ01
Carrier
Bandwidth -
0 MHz to 5
MHz for
Blade&AA
U
Carrier
bandwidth
licence (per
cell) for an
AAU or blade
RRU
When a cell uses 10 MHz, 15 MHz, 20 MHz, or
less than or equal to 5 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a
blade RRU.
LT1S010
MHZ01
Carrier
Bandwidth -
5 MHz to 10
MHz for
Blade&AA
U
Carrier
bandwidth
licence (per
cell) for an
AAU or blade
RRU
When a cell uses 10 MHz, 15 MHz, or 20 MHz
bandwidth, one license is configured for the
cell.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a
blade RRU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 166/239
ExternalModel
LicensePackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
LT1S015
MHZ01
Carrier
Bandwidth -
10 MHz to
15 MHz for
Blade&AA
U
Carrier
bandwidth
licence (per
cell) for an
AAU or blade
RRU
When a cell uses 15 MHz or 20 MHz
bandwidth, one license is configured for the
cell.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a
blade RRU.
LT1S020
MHZ01
Carrier
Bandwidth -
15 MHz to
20 MHz for
Blade&AAU
Carrier
bandwidth
licence (per
cell) for an
AAU or bladeRRU
When a cell uses 20 MHz bandwidth, one
license is configured for the cell.
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a
blade RRU.
LT1S00R
FTC01
RF
Transmit
Channel for
Blade&AA
U
Blade&AAU
RF Transmit
Channel(per
Channel)
This package is required when the RF module
has more than two RF transmit channels.
Each RF module has two RF transmit channels.
Add this package for each extra RF transmit
channel of an RF module.
This package applies only to the RF modules
with four transmit channels (4T RF modules).
The number of licenses to be configured is
calculated by the following formula: Number of licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs
with more than two transmit channels x
(Number of transmit channels of a single RRU
- 2)
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a
blade RRU.
LT1S00R
FRC01
RF Receive
Channel for
Blade&AA
U
Blade&AAU
RF Receive
Channel (per
Channel)
This package is required when the RF module
has more than two RF transmit channels.
Each RF module has two RF receive channels.
When the number of RF receive channelsexceeds 2, one package is required for each
added receive channel.
This package applies only to the RF modules
with four receive channels (4R RF modules).
The number of licenses to be configured is
calculated by the following formula: Number of
licenses to be configured = Number of RRUs
with more than two receive channels x (Number
of receive channels of a single RRU - 2)
This license applies to a multimode AAU or a
blade RRU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 167/239
NOTE
In MIMO scenarios, the power of each module is the product of the number of MIMO channels and the
output power of each channel. For example:
l 2x2 MIMO (2x30 W): Each RRU requires 60 W power and is configured with two RF channels.
l 2x2 MIMO (2x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels.
l 4x2 MIMO (4x40 W): Each RRU requires 80 W power and is configured with three RF channels.
The BBU3900 supports hybrid configuration of the LBBPc, LBBPd1, LBBPd2, LBBPd3, UBBPd3,
UBBPd4, UBBPd5, and UBBPd6.
License Configuration of Multimode Base Stations
This section describes the principles for configuring hardware licenses, co-MPT licenses, and
co-BBP licenses for multimode base stations.
Hardware License Configuration for Multimode Base Stations
The following table lists the principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base
stations.
Table 4-70 Principles for configuring the hardware licenses for multimode base stations
ExternalModel
License PackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
WDMS00
GUDM00
RF GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode license
(per sector)
Dual-mode
license for GU
RF modules
One package is configured for each
sector served by a GU RF module.
WDMS00
GLDM00
RF GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license (per
sector)
Dual-mode
license for GL
RF modules
One package is configured for each
sector served by a GL RF module.
WDMS00
ULDM00
RF UMTS/LTE
Dual Mode license
(per sector)
Dual-mode
license for UL
RF modules
One package is configured for each
sector served by a UL RF module.
WDMS00GUDM01
GSM/UMTS DualMode license for
Blade&AAU (per
sector)
GU dual-modelicense for an
AAU or blade
RRU
In GU dual mode, one package isconfigured for each sector.
This license applies to a multimode
AAU or a blade RRU.
WDMS00
GLDM01
GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license for
Blade&AAU (per
sector)
GL dual-mode
license for an
AAU or blade
RRU
In GL dual mode, one package is
configured for each sector.
This license applies to a multimode
AAU or a blade RRU.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 168/239
ExternalModel
License PackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
WDMS00
ULDM01
UMTS/LTE Dual
Mode license for Blade&AAU (per
sector)
UL dual-mode
license for anAAU or blade
RRU
For a UL dual-mode base station, one
package is configured for each sector.This license applies to a multimode
AAU or a blade RRU.
Co-MPT License Configuration for Multimode Base Stations
The following table lists the principles for configuring the co-MPT licenses for multimode base
stations.
Table 4-71 Co-MPT license configuration for multimode base stations
Model License PackageDescription
Function Configuration Principle
WDMS0
UMMG0
0
MPT Multi Mode
license (GSM) (Per
UMPT)
Co-MPT
license for
GSM
Configure this package based on the
number of GSM base stations supported by
each UMPT(1). Each base station can be
configured with a maximum of one such
license.
WDMS0UMMU0
0
MPT Multi Modelicense (UMTS)
(Per UMPT)
Co-MPTlicense for
UMTS
Configure this package based on thenumber of UMTS base stations supported
by each UMPT(1). Each base station can be
configured with a maximum of one such
license.
WDMS0
UMML00
MPT Multi Mode
license (LTE FDD)
(Per UMPT)
Co-MPT
license for
LTE
Configure this package based on the
number of LTE base stations supported by
each UMPT(1). Each base station can be
configured with a maximum of one such
license.
NOTE
(1) Each UMPT supports one mode by default. One license needs to be added for each additional mode.
When multiple modes are configured for a UMPT, first quote a UMPT for the earliest mode and then add
licenses for later modes. The GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes are arranged from the earliest to the latest as
follows: GSM < UMTS < LTE
Co-BBP License Configuration for Multimode Base Stations
The following table lists the configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base
stations.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 169/239
Table 4-72 Configuration principles for co-BBP licenses of multimode base stations
Model License PackageDescription
Function ConfigurationPrinciple
WDMS00UFMG00 UBBP First-Modelicense (GSM) (per
UBBP)
License for the firstmode (GSM) of the
UBBPa
One piece of thelicense is configured
for each UBBP that
uses GSM as its first
mode.
WDMS00UMMG00 UBBP Multi-Mode
license (GSM) (per
UBBP)
License for adding a
new mode (GSM) of
the UBBPa
One piece of this
license is configured
for each UBBP to
which GSM is added
as a new mode (either
replacing the first
mode or concurrentwith the first mode).
WDMS00UFMU00 UBBP First-Mode
license (UMTS) (per
UBBP)
License for the first
mode (UMTS) of the
UBBPa
One piece of the
license is configured
for each UBBP that
uses UMTS as its
first mode.
WDMS00UMMU00 UBBP Multi-Mode
license (UMTS (per
UBBP)
License for adding a
new mode (UMTS)
of the UBBPa
One piece of this
license is configured
for each UBBP to
which UMTS isadded as a new mode
(either replacing the
first mode or
concurrent with the
first mode).
WDMS0UFMLF00 UBBP First-Mode
license (LTE FDD)
(per UBBP)
License for the first
mode (LTE FDD) of
the UBBPa
One piece of the
license is configured
for each UBBP that
uses LTE FDD as its
first mode.
WDMS0UMMLF00 UBBP Multi-Mode
license (LTE FDD)
(per UBBP)
License for adding a
new mode (LTE
FDD) of the UBBPa
One piece of this
license is configured
for each UBBP to
which LTE FDD is
added as a new mode
(either replacing the
first mode or
concurrent with the
first mode).
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 170/239
Model License PackageDescription
Function ConfigurationPrinciple
(1) In newly deployed single-mode sites, the license for the first mode (UBBP First-Mode
license) must be quoted.(2) In newly deployed multimode sites, if licenses for multiple modes are purchased together,
the license for a higher mode can be purchased with the license for a lower mode for free.
The modes are arranged from the lowest to the highest as follows: GSM > UMTS > LTE FDD
> LTE TDD.
(3) In mode transition scenarios such as single mode to single mode, single mode to multimode
concurrency, and multimode concurrency with new mode added, the UBBP Multi-Mode
license corresponding to the newly added mode must be purchased.
4.4 Configurations for a Lampsite Base Station
4.4.1 BBU Configurations in a Lampsite Base Station
In a Lampsite base station, main control units and base band processing units in a BBU vary
depending on product versions. The following table lists mapping between the board and product
version in a Lampsite base station.
Table 4-73 Mapping between the board and product version in a Lampsite base station
Product Version Board
Type
LTE FDD UMTS UL Dual-Mode
Separate-
MPT
Co-MPT
SRAN 9.0 Main
Control
Unit
UMPTa,
UMPTb,
and LMPT
UMPTa and
UMPTb
UMPTa
and
UMPTb
UMPTb
Baseband
Processin
g Unit
LBBPd
and
UBBPd
WBBPd,
WBBPf,
and UBBPd
UMTS: WBBPf, WBBPd
(providing only baseband
resources), and UBBPd
LTE: LBBPd and UBBPd
NOTE
LTE FDD mode is configured with the LMPT only in base station conversion scenarios. In a newly deployed
base station, the UMPT is delivered and the LMPT is not recommended.
Restrictions on the BBU configurations in a Lampsite base station are as follows:
l A single BBU can support a maximum of 18 LTE RF cells.
l A single BBU can support a maximum of 12 UMTS RF cells.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 171/239
l In UL dual-mode scenarios, the WBBPd can only be used to provide UMTS baseband
resources and cannot be used to provide CPRI optical ports.
l When the UBBPd is used, UMTS and LTE modes cannot be deployed on the same baseband
processing unit in a Lampsite base station and must be separately deployed on different
baseband processing units.
l In a macro+micro site, if the UBBPd is used as a multi-mode baseband processing unit in
the macro base station, one UMTS baseband processing unit and one LTE baseband
processing unit need to be configured in the Lampsite base station.
l If a Lampsite base station is deployed with UL modes, the RHUB can only be connected
to the CPRI port on the baseband processing unit in slot 2 or 3 of the BBU using a single
fiber optic cable, and the BBU must use the CPRI MUX feature.
4.4.2 Basic RHUB Configuration Principles
The following figure shows the exterior of an RHUB3908. The following table lists the
RHUB3908 configuration principles.
Figure 4-2 Exterior of an RHUB3908
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 172/239
Table 4-74 RHUB3908 configurations
Model Description Function MaximumQuant
ity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD6M39RHU
B00
RHUB3908,
WD6M1RBH2,
pRRU pool and
PoE support
(2xCPRI SFP,
8xCPRI OVER
PHY with PSE,
PSU, Global)
CPRI
transmission
signal
combination
unit of the
pRRU Supports
RF signal
division and
combination of
the pRRU cell
and supports
CPRI data
compression
and
decompression
of various
modes.
24 A single BBU can be
configured with a
maximum of 24
RHUBs.
The code applies to
global markets except
Japan.
The RHUB of this code
is not configured with
power cables.Therefore, the RHUB
needs to be delivered
with AC power cables
according to countries
and areas.
The basic HUB3908 configuration principles are as follows:
l A single SRAN9.0 BBU supports a maximum of 24 RHUBs.
l The RHUB and BBU (or the RHUB and RHUB) can be connected in the single-star or
chain topology. The RHUB supports a maximum of four cascading levels.
l The RHUB optical port supports a maximum rate of 9.8 Gbit/s and supports adaptive
switching among 1.228 Gbit/s, 2.4576 Gbit/s, 4.9152 Gbit/s, 9.8304 Gbit/s.
l The RHUB and pRRU are connected through the GE electrical port and support the single-
chain topology and load sharing mode. Each RHUB can connect to a maximum of eight
pRRUs.
l The RHUB electrical port only supports the CPRI data rate of 1.228 Gbit/s.
The following table lists the carrier configuration principles of the SRAN9.0 RHUB.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 173/239
Table 4-75 Carrier configuration principles of the SRAN9.0 RHUB
ApplicationScenario
Carrier Configuration Principle of the SRAN9.0 RHUB
LTE FDD l A single RHUB supports a maximum of four LTE carriers.
l A single RHUB supports a maximum of four independent
pRRU groups. Each pRRU group supports a maximum of two
LTE carriers.
l LTE supports combination of RF signals from cells connected
through the RHUB. LTE supports combination of RF signals
from a maximum of 16 pRRUs connected to four RHUBs on
the same chain.
l In LTE mode, a maximum of six RF cells configured on
different baseband processing units can form one baseband cell.
NOTELTE does not support combination of baseband signals from RF cells
configured on different baseband processing units.
UMTS l A single RHUB supports a maximum of four UMTS carriers.
l A single RHUB supports a maximum of two independent pRRU
groups. Each pRRU group supports a maximum of two UMTS
carriers.
l UMTS supports combination of RF signals from RF cells
connected through the RHUB. UMTS supports combination of
RF signals from a maximum of 16 pRRUs connected to four
RHUBs on the same chain.
l In UMTS mode, a maximum of six RF cells configured on
different baseband processing units can form one baseband cell.
NOTE
A single RHUB that is configured with one pRRU group supports a
maximum of two carriers.
4.4.3 Basic pRRU Configurations
The following table lists the pRRU configuration principles.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 174/239
Table 4-76 pRRU configuration principles
Model Description Function MaximumQuant
ity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD5MP390110
0
pRRU3901,
WD6M1PRU4,
pRRU3901,
UMTS Multi-
Carriers Remote
Radio Unit (Band
I: TX2110-2170
MHz/
RX1920-1980
MHz, PoE/12 V
DC, 1.25 Gbit/s,
1T2R, 1x200
mW)
Air interface
specifications
2.1 Gbit/s
1T2R UMTS
TX power:
1x200 mW
Carrier
specifications:
2 carriers(UMTS)
96 (Optional) This module
is used when a 2.1 GHz
frequency band is
configured for UMTS.
The number of modules
depends on site
requirements.
RF modules supporting
2.1 GHz frequency band
apply to global markets.
WD6M18RRU
L00
pRRU3901,
WD6M1PRU3,
pRRU, LTE
Single-mode
Remote Radio
Unit (Band III:
TX1805-1860
MHz/RX1710-1765
MHz, PoE/12 V
DC, 1.25 Gbit/s,
2T2R, 2x100
mW, with
Installation Kit)
Air interface
specifications
1.8 Gbit/s
2T2R LTE
FDD
TX power:
2x100 mW
Carrier
specifications:
1 carrier (LTE)
LTE supports
a scalable
bandwidth of 5
MHz, 10 MHz,
15 MHz, or 20
MHz.
96 (Optional) This module
is used when a 1.8 GHz
frequency band is
configured for LTE. The
number of modules
depends on site
requirements.
RF modules supporting55 MHz of the 1.8 GHz
frequency band apply to
China.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 175/239
Model Description Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD6M39PRRU
05
pRRU3901,
WD6M1PRU6,
pRRU, Multi-
Mode Remote
Radio Unit Band I
(S1)+Band III
(S2) (PoE/12 V
DC, 1.25 Gbit/s,
with Installation
Kit), (TX2110 to
2170 MHz/
RX1920 to 1980
MHz, 2T2R, 200
mW), (TX1805 to
1860 MHz/
RX1710 to 1765
MHz, 2T2R,
2x100 mW)
Air interface
specifications
1.8 GHz:
2T2R LTE
FDD
2.1G 1T2R
UMTS
Transmit
power:
1.8 GHz:
2x100 mW
2.1 GHz:
1x200 mW
Carrier
specifications:
1 carrier (LTE
FDD)
2 carriers
(UMTS)
LTE supportsa scalable
bandwidth of 5
MHz, 10 MHz,
15 MHz, or 20
MHz.
96 (Optional) This module
is used when a 1.8 GHz
frequency band is
configured for LTE and
a 2.1 GHz frequency
band is configured for
UMTS. The number of
modules depends on site
requirements.
RF modules supporting
55 MHz of the 1.8 GHz
frequency band apply to
China.
l In co-MPT
scenarios, a
maximum of 48
pRRUs are
supported.
l In separate-MPT
scenarios, a
maximum of 96
pRRUs aresupported.
WD6M39PRRU
00
pRRU3901,
WD6M1PRUa,
pRRU, LTE
Single-mode
Remote Radio
Unit (Band III:TX1805-1880
MHz/
RX1710-1785
MHz, PoE/12 V
DC, 1.25 Gbit/s,
2T2R, 2x100
mW, with
Installation Kit)
Air interface
specifications
1.8 GHz:
2T2R LTE
FDD
TX power:
2x100 mW
Carrier
specifications:
1 carrier (LTE)
LTE supports
a scalable
bandwidth of 5
MHz, 10 MHz,
15 MHz, or 20
MHz.
96 (Optional) This module
is used when a 1.8 GHz
frequency band is
configured for LTE. The
number of modules
depends on siterequirements.
RF modules supporting
75 MHz of the 1.8 GHz
frequency band apply to
global markets.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 176/239
Model Description Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD6M39PRRU
01
pRRU3901,
WD6M1PRU8,
pRRU, Multi-
Mode Remote
Radio Unit Band I
(S1)+Band III
(S2) (PoE/12 V
DC, 1.25 Gbit/s,
with Installation
Kit), (TX2110 to
2170 MHz/
RX1920 to 1980
MHz, 2T2R, 200
mW), (TX1805 to
1880 MHz/
RX1710 to 1785
MHz, 2T2R,
2x100 mW)
Air interface
specifications
1.8 GHz:
2T2R LTE
FDD
2.1 GHz:
1T2R UMTS
Transmit
power:
1.8 GHz:
2x100 mW
2.1 GHz:
1x200 mW
Carrier
specifications:
1 carrier (LTE
FDD)
2 carriers
(UMTS)
LTE supportsa scalable
bandwidth of 5
MHz, 10 MHz,
15 MHz, or 20
MHz.
96 (Optional) This module
is used when a 1.8 GHz
frequency band is
configured for LTE and
a 2.1 GHz frequency
band is configured for
UMTS. The number of
modules depends on site
requirements.
RF modules supporting
75 MHz of the 1.8 GHz
frequency band apply to
global markets.
l In co-MPT
scenarios, a
maximum of 48
pRRUs are
supported.
l In separate-MPT
scenarios, a
maximum of 96
pRRUs aresupported.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 177/239
Model Description Function MaximumQuantity
ConfigurationPrinciple
WD6M39PRRU
02
Function Module,
pRRU3901,
WD6M1PRU9,
pRRU, Multi-
Mode Remote
Radio Unit Band I
(S1)+Band I (S2)
(PoE/12 V DC,
1.25 Gbit/s, with
Installation Kit),
(TX2110 to 2170
MHz/RX1920 to
1980 MHz,
2T2R, 200 mW),
(TX2110 to 2170
MHz/RX1920 to
1980 MHz,
2T2R, 200 mW)
Air interface
specifications
2.1 GHz:
1T2R UMTS
2.1 GHz:
2T2R LTE
FDD
Transmit
power:
1x200 mW
(UMTS)
2x100 mW
(LTE)
Carrier
specifications:
2 carriers
(UMTS)
1 carrier (LTE
FDD)
LTE supportsa scalable
bandwidth of 5
MHz, 10 MHz,
15 MHz, or 20
MHz.
96 (Optional) This module
is used when a 2.1 GHz
frequency band is
configured for LTE and
a 2.1 GHz frequency
band is configured for
UMTS. The number of
modules depends on site
requirements.
l In co-MPT
scenarios, a
maximum of 48
pRRUs are
supported.
l In separate-MPT
scenarios, a
maximum of 96
pRRUs are
supported.
The pRRU configuration principles are as follows:
l In newly deployed Lampsite networks, pRRUs cannot be split and must be sold integrally.
Application for pRRU codes has been submitted for the frequency band combination
supported by current versions.
l Two pRRUs cannot be combined to implement MIMO.
l The pRRU provides two CPRI ports, each supporting a 1.228 Gbit/s rate, to exchange data
with the RHUB.
l The pRRU and RHUB can be connected in the branch chain (single-link) topology or branch
load sharing mode.
l When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in the branch chain (single-link) topology, each
RHUB supports a maximum of 8 pRRUs and a single BBU supports a maximum of 96
pRRUs.
l When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in the single-chain topology, each RHUB
supports the following configurations:
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 178/239
– 1. Two carriers for UO mode
– 2. One carrier with a maximum bandwidth of 20 MHz for LO mode
– 3. LTE carrier with a 20 MHz bandwidth (compression mode is 3:1) and a maximum
of two UMTS carriers for UL dual-mode mode
Connections of the branch chain (single-link) topology
l When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in branch load sharing mode, each RHUB
supports a maximum of 4 pRRUs and a single BBU supports a maximum of 48 pRRUs.
When the pRRU and RHUB are connected in load sharing mode, each RHUB supports the
following configurations:
– 1. Two LTE carriers, each supporting a 20 MHz bandwidth
– 2. LTE carrier, each supporting a 20 MHz bandwidth (compression mode is 2:1), and
a maximum of two UMTS carriers for UL dual-mode mode
Connections of the branch load sharing mode
l The CPRI bandwidth of the pRRU and RHUB is less than or equal to 2.456 Gbit/s.
Therefore, it is recommended that services be processed by two pRRUs if the CPRI
bandwidth is greater than 2.456 Gbit/s.
4.5 Typical Configurations and Capacity Expansion
This section describes the typical configuration scenarios and capacity expansion scenarios of
3900 series base stations.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 179/239
4.5.1 Typical Configurations
This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in various
application scenarios.
GSM Mode
This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in GSM mode and
using RFUs or RRUs.
Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations Using RFUs
Table 4-77 and Table 4-78 list the typical configurations of 3900 series macro base stations in
GSM mode and using DRFUs and GRFUs, respectively.
NOTE
DRFUs are not configured in a BTS3900AL cabinet.
Table 4-77 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using DRFUs
ProductConfig uration
S1/1/1(Without aCombiner)
S2/2/2(Without aCombiner)
S3/3/3(With aCombiner)
S4/4/4(With aCombiner)
S4/4/4(Without aCombiner)
S6/6/6(With aCombiner)
S8/8/8(With aCombiner)
BTS390
0 cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS390
0A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS390
0L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DRFU 3 3 5 6 6 9 12
3900
Series
DRFU
Transcei
ver (per
TRX)
License
0 3 4 6 6 9 12
Antenna 3 3 3 3 6 6 6
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 180/239
Table 4-78 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using GRFUs
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S6/6/6 S8/8/8
BTS3900
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900
A cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900
L cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900
AL cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1
GRFU 3 3 3 3 3 6
3900
Series
GRFU
Transceiv
er (per
TRX)
0 3 6 9 15 18
Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3
Typical Configurations of GSM Base Stations Using RRUs
Table 4-79 and Table 4-80 list the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in GSM mode and using
RRU3004 and RRU3008 modules, respectively.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 181/239
Table 4-79 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using RRU3004 modules
ProductConfig uration
S1/1/1(Without a
Combiner)
S2/2/2(Without a
Combiner)
S3/3/3(With aCombi
ner)
S4/4/4(With aCombi
ner)
S4/4/4(Without a
Combiner)
S6/6/6(With aCombi
ner)
S8/8/8(With aCombi
ner)
Cabinet
(optional
)
1 1 1 1 1 l APM
30H
(Ver.
B): 2
l APM
30H
(Ver.
D): 1
l APM
30H
(Ver.
B): 2
l APM
30H
(Ver.
D): 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
RRU300
4
3 3 6 6 6 9 12
3900
Series
RRU300
4
Transcei
ver (per TRX)
0 3 4 6 6 9 12
Antenna 3 3 3 3 6 6 6
Table 4-80 Typical configurations of GSM base stations using RRU3008 modules
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S6/6/6 S8/8/8
Cabinet
(optional)
1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1
RRU3008 3 3 3 3 3 6
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 182/239
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S6/6/6 S8/8/8
3900Series
RRU3008
Transceiv
er (per
TRX)
0 3 6 9 15 18
Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3
UMTS Mode
This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in UMTS mode
and using RFUs or RRUs.
NOTE
l In non-MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In MIMO configurations,
each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W).
l In actual configurations, only one type of baseband board is selected.
Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations Using RFUs
A 3900 series macro base station in UMTS mode can be configured with WRFUs with different
power, for example, WRFU (80 W) and WRFUd (2x60 W). Table 4-81 and Table 4-82 list the
typical configurations of the base stations using different RFUs.
Table 4-81 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using WRFUs (80 W)
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1(Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2(Non-MIMO)
S3/3/3(Non-MIMO)
S4/4/4(Non-MIMO)
S1/1/1(MIMO)
S2/2/2(MIMO)
S3/3/3(MIMO)
S4/4/4(MIMO)
BTS3900cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 183/239
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1(Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2(Non-MIMO)
S3/3/3(Non-MIMO)
S4/4/4(Non-MIMO)
S1/1/1(MIMO)
S2/2/2(MIMO)
S3/3/3(MIMO)
S4/4/4(MIMO)
WMPT/
UMPTa1/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Baseb
and
proces
sing
board
WBB
Pd
1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4
WBB
Pf3/4
1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2
WRFU (80 W) 3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)
0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9
Power License
(per 20W)
0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18
Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Table 4-82 Typical configurations of a UMTS base station using WRFUd (2x60 W) modules
ProductConfig uration
S1/1/1(Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2(Non-MIMO)
S3/3/3(Non-MIMO)
S4/4/4(Non-MIMO)
S1/1/1(MIMO)
S2/2/2(MIMO)
S3/3/3(MIMO)
BTS390
0 cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS390
0A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS390
0L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS390
0AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 184/239
ProductConfig uration
S1/1/1(Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2(Non-MIMO)
S3/3/3(Non-MIMO)
S4/4/4(Non-MIMO)
S1/1/1(MIMO)
S2/2/2(MIMO)
S3/3/3(MIMO)
UMPTa1/
UMPTb
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WBBPf3
/4
1 1 2 2 1 1 2
WRFUd
(2x60
W)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Multi
Carrier
License
(per
Carrier)
0 3 6 9 3 6 9
Power
License
(per
20W)
0 3 6 9 3 9 15
Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Typical Configurations of UMTS Base Stations Using RRUs
The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in UMTS mode and using
RRU3806 or RRU3826 modules.
Table 4-83 Typical configurations of a DBS3900 using RRU3806/RRU3826 modules
Product
Configuration
S1/1/1
(Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2
(Non-MIMO)
S3/3/3
(Non-MIMO)
S4/4/4
(Non-MIMO)
S1/1/1
(MIMO)
S2/2/2
(MIMO)
S3/3/3
(MIMO)
S4/4/4
(MIMO)
Cabinet
(optional)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UMPTa1/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Baseb
and
WBB
Pd
1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 185/239
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1(Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2(Non-MIMO)
S3/3/3(Non-MIMO)
S4/4/4(Non-MIMO)
S1/1/1(MIMO)
S2/2/2(MIMO)
S3/3/3(MIMO)
S4/4/4(MIMO)
proces
sing
board
WBB
Pf3/4
1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2
RRU3806 (80
W)
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)
0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9
Power License
(per 20W)
0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18
Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
The following table lists the typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) base station in UMTS
mode and using RRU3806 modules.
Table 4-84 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) using RRU3806 modules
ProductConfiguration
O1
Non-MIMO
O2
Non-MIMO
O3
Non-MIMO
O4
Non-MIMO
OMB (Ver.C)
cabinet
1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1
WMPT/UMPTa1/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1
Baseba
nd
process
ing
board
WBBP
d
1 1 1 1
WBBPf
3/4
1 1 1 1
RRU3806 1 1 1 1
Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)
0 1 2 3
Power License
(per 20W)
0 1 2 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 186/239
ProductConfiguration
O1
Non-MIMO
O2
Non-MIMO
O3
Non-MIMO
O4
Non-MIMO
Antenna 1 1 1 1
LTE Mode
This section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station in LTE mode and
using RFUs or RRUs.
NOTE
l This table assumes that each channel provides 20 W power.
l In actual configuration, only one type of baseband board or RF module is selected.
Typical Configurations of LTE Base Stations (with RFUs)
The following table lists the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in LTE mode
and using LRFUs.
Table 4-85 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using LRFUs
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
BandwidthDL 2x2MIMO
S2/2/2 Co-Frequency
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 4x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 4x2MIMO
BTS3900
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1
LMPT/
UMPTa2/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1 1
Baseb
and
board
LBBPc 1 1 1 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 187/239
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S2/2/2 Co-Frequency
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 4x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 4x2MIMO
LBBPd 1
(LBBPd1)
1 (LBBPd1) 2(LBBPd1)/
1 (LBBPd3)
1
(LBBPd2)
1 (LBBPd2)
UBBP
d
1
(UBBPd3)
1(UBBPd3) 2(UBBPd3)/
1(UBBPd5)
1
(UBBPd4)
1(UBBPd4)
LRFU 3 3 3 6 6
RF Output
Power (per 20
W)
3 3 3 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz
3 3 6 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10 MHz
3 3 6 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth - 10MHz to 15 MHz
0 3 0 0 3
Carrier
Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20 MHz
0 3 0 0 3
Resource Block 150 300 300 150 300
BB Transmit
Channel
0 0 0 6 6
BB Receive
Channel
0 0 0 6 6
RF Transmit
Channel
0 0 0 6 6
RF Receive
Channel
0 0 0 6 6
LTE Multi
Carrier (per
Carrier)
0 0 3 0 0
Antenna 3 3 3 6 6
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 188/239
LTE Base Station Configurations (with RRUs)The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in LTE mode and using the
RRU3201.
Table 4-86 Typical configurations of LTE base stations using the RRU3201
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 4x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 4x2MIMO
Cabinet (optional) 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1
UMPTa2/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1
Baseban
d board
LBBPc 1 1 1 3
LBBP
d
1 1 1 1
UBBPd
1(UBBPd3) 1(UBBPd3) 1(UBBPd4) 1(UBBPd4)
RRU3201 3 3 6 6
RF Output Power
(per 20 W)
3 3 6 6
Carrier Bandwidth
- 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3 3 3 3
Carrier Bandwidth
- 5 MHz to 10 MHz
3 3 3 3
Carrier Bandwidth
- 10 MHz to 15
MHz
0 3 0 3
Carrier Bandwidth
- 15 MHz to 20
MHz
0 3 0 3
Resource block
(required for the
LBBPd2)
150 300 150 300
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 189/239
ProductConfiguration
S1/1/1
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 4x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 4x2MIMO
BB transmit
channel (required
for the LBBPd2)
0 0 6 6
Antenna 3 3 6 6
GU Co-Module
This section describes the typical configurations when GSM and UMTS are deployed on one
SDR modules of a 3900 series base station.
NOTE
The power of each WCDMA carrier is configured to 20 W.
Typical Configurations of GU Co-module Base Stations Using MRFUs
Multimode RFUs can be configured in a 3900 series macro base station in the GU separate-MPT
or GU co-MPT scenario. Table 4-87 and Table 4-88 list the typical configurations in thesescenarios.
Table 4-87 Typical configurations of a GU separate-MPT base station using MRFUs
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
WCD
MA
900MHz
S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2
BTS39
00
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 190/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
BTS3900AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WMPT
/
UMPT
a1/
UMPT
b1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WBBP
d/
WBBPf
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MRFU/
MRFU
e/
MRFU
d
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GSM/UMTS
Dual
Mode
license
(per
sector)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GSM
Multipl
e
Transce
iver for the 2nd
TRX of
Multi-
Mode
Module
0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 191/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
GSMMultipl
e
Transce
iver for
Multi-
Mode
Module
0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3
GSM
Multipl
e
Transceiver for
Multi-
Mode
Module
0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6
WCD
MA
Multi
Carrier
License
for the
1stCarrier
of
Multi-
Mode
Module
(per
Carrier)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
WCD
MA
Multi
Carrier
License
for
Multi-
Mode
Module
(per
Carrier)
0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 192/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
Power License
(per
20W)
0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3
Antenn
a
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Table 4-88 Typical configurations of a GU co-MPT base station using MRFUs
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
WCD
MA
900
MHz
S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2
BTS39
00
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UMPT
b1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UBRIb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WBBPf 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 193/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
MRFU/MRFU
e/
MRFU
d
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GSM/
UMTS
Dual
Mode
license
(per
sector)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GSM
Multipl
e
Transce
iver for
the 2nd
TRX of
Multi-
Mode
Module
0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3
GSM
Multipl
e
Transce
iver for
Multi-
Mode
Module
0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6
WCD
MA
MultiCarrier
License
for the
1st
Carrier
of
Multi-
Mode
Module
(per
Carrier)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 194/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
WCDMA
Multi
Carrier
License
for
Multi-
Mode
Module
(per
Carrier)
0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3
Power License
(per
20W)
0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3
MPT
Multi
Mode
license
(UMTS
)(per
UMPT)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Antenn
a
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Typical Configurations of GU Base Stations Using RRUs
An RRU3908, RRU3926, or RRU3928 can be configured in a DBS3900 in the GU separate-
MPT or GU co-MPT scenario. Table 4-89 and Table 4-90 list the typical configurations in these
scenarios.
Table 4-89 Typical configurations of a DBS3900 in separate-MPT scenario using RRU3908
modules
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
WCD
MA
900
MHz
S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 195/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
Cabinet(option
al)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WMPT
/
UMPT
a1/
UMPT
b1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WBBP
d/
WBBPf
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
RRU39
08/
RRU39
29/
RRU39
28
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GSM/
UMTS
Dual
Mode
license
(per
sector)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GSM
Multipl
e
Transceiver for
the 2nd
TRX of
Multi-
Mode
Module
0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 196/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
GSMMultipl
e
Transce
iver for
Multi-
Mode
Module
0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6
WCD
MA
Multi
Carrier License
for the
1st
Carrier
of
Multi-
Mode
Module
(per
Carrier)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
WCDMA
Multi
Carrier
License
for
Multi-
Mode
Module
(per
Carrier)
0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3
Power
License
(per
20W)
0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3
Antenn
a
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 197/239
Table 4-90 Typical configurations of a DBS3900 in co-MPT scenario using RRU3929/
RRU3928 modules
GSM900
MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
WCD
MA
900
MHz
S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2
Cabinet
(option
al)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UMPT
b1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UBRIb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WBBPf 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
RRU39
29/
RRU39
28
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GSM/UMTS
Dual
Mode
license
(per
sector)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GSM
Multipl
e
Transce
iver for the 2nd
TRX of
Multi-
Mode
Module
0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 198/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
GSMMultipl
e
Transce
iver for
Multi-
Mode
Module
0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6
WCD
MA
Multi
Carrier License
for the
1st
Carrier
of
Multi-
Mode
Module
(per
Carrier)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
WCDMA
Multi
Carrier
License
for
Multi-
Mode
Module
(per
Carrier)
0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3
Power
License
(per
20W)
0 0 0 0 3 3 3 3
MPT
Multi
Mode
license
(UMTS
)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 199/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
Antenna 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
The RRU3929 can be configured in a BTS3900C (Ver.C) cabinet in the GU separate-MPT or
GU co-MPT scenario. Table 4-91 and Table 4-92 list the typical configurations in these
scenarios.
Table 4-91 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) in separate-MPT scenario using
RRU3929 modules
GSM 900MHz
O1 O2 O3 O4 O4
WCDMA
900 MHz
O1 O1 O1 O1 O2
OMB
(Ver.C)
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1
WMPT/
UMPTa1/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1 1
WBBPd/
WBBPf
1 1 1 1 1
RRU3929 1 1 1 1 1
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license (per
sector)
1 1 1 1 1
GSM
Multiple
Transceiver
for the 2nd
TRX of
Multi-Mode
Module
0 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 200/239
GSM 900MHz
O1 O2 O3 O4 O4
GSM
MultipleTransceiver
for Multi-
Mode
Module
0 0 1 2 2
WCDMA
Multi Carrier
License for
the 1st
Carrier of
Multi-Mode
Module (per Carrier)
1 1 1 1 1
WCDMA
Multi Carrier
License for
Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)
0 0 0 0 1
Power
License (per
20W)
0 0 0 0 1
Antenna 1 1 1 1 1
Table 4-92 Typical configurations of a BTS3900C (Ver.C) in co-MPT scenario using RRU3929
modules
GSM 900MHz
O1 O2 O3 O4 O4
WCDMA
900 MHz
O1 O1 O1 O1 O2
OMB
(Ver.C)
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1
UMPTb1 1 1 1 1 1
UBRIb 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 201/239
GSM 900MHz
O1 O2 O3 O4 O4
WBBPd/
WBBPf
1 1 1 1 1
RRU3929 1 1 1 1 1
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license (per
sector)
1 1 1 1 1
GSM
Multiple
Transceiver
for the 2nd
TRX of
Multi-Mode
Module
1 1 1 1 1
GSM
Multiple
Transceiver
for Multi-
Mode
Module
0 0 1 2 2
WCDMA
Multi Carrier License for
the 1st
Carrier of
Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)
1 1 1 1 1
WCDMA
Multi Carrier
License for
Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)
0 0 0 0 1
Power
License (per
20W)
0 0 0 0 1
MPT Multi
Mode license
(UMTS)
1 1 1 1 1
Antenna 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 202/239
GU Co-BBUThis section describes the typical configurations when GSM and UMTS are deployed on one
BBU of a 3900 series base station.
NOTE
l In UMTS non-MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In UMTS MIMO
configurations, each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W).
l In actual configurations, only one type of baseband processing board or RF module is selected.
Typical Configurations of a GU Co-BBU Base Station Using RFUs
For a 3900 series base station in GU separate-MPT scenario, Table 4-93 lists the typical
configurations when the WRFU (80 W) is used and Table 4-94 lists the typical configurations
when the WRFUd (2x60 W) is used.
Table 4-93 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station using WRFUs
(80 W)
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
GSM1800
MHz
N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4
WCD
MA
2100
MHz
S1/1/1
Non-
MIMO
S2/2/2
Non-
MIMO
S3/3/3
Non-
MIMO
S4/4/4
Non-
MIMO
S1/1/1
MIMO
S2/2/2
MIMO
S3/3/3
MIMO
S4/4/4
MIMO
BTS39
00
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 203/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
WMPT/
UMPT
a1/
UMPT
b1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WBBP
d
1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4
WRFU
(80 W)
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
GRFU
(900
MHz)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GRFU
(1800
MHz)
0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3
Multi
Carrier
License(per
Carrier)
0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9
RF
Output
Power
(per
20W)
0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18
3900
Series
GRFUTransce
iver
(per
TRX)
0 3 6 12 0 3 6 12
Antenn
a
6 6 9 9 6 6 9 9
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 204/239
Table 4-94 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station using WRFUd
(2x60 W) modules
GSM900
MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1
GSM
1800
MHz
N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 N/A N/A S3/3/3
WCDM
A 2100
MHz
S1/1/1
Non-
MIMO
S2/2/2
Non-
MIMO
S3/3/3
Non-
MIMO
S4/4/4
Non-
MIMO
S1/1/1
MIMO
S2/2/2
MIMO
S3/3/3
MIMO
BTS390
0 cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS390
0A
cabinet
1 1 2 2 1 1 2
BTS390
0L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS390
0AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UMPTa
1/
UMPTb
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WBBPf 1 1 2 2 1 1 2
WRFUd
(2x60W)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GRFU
(900
MHz)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
GRFU
(1800
MHz)
0 0 3 3 0 0 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 205/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1
MultiCarrier
License
(per
Carrier)
0 3 6 9 0 3 6
RF
Output
Power
(per
20W)
0 3 6 9 3 9 15
3900Series
GRFU
Transcei
ver (per
TRX)
0 3 6 12 0 3 6
Antenna 6 6 9 9 6 6 9
Typical Configurations of a GU Co-BBU Base Station Using RRUs
The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in the GU co-BBU mode.
Table 4-95 Typical configurations of a GU co-BBU separate-MPT base station using RRUs
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
GSM
1800
MHz
N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4
WCD
MA
2100
MHz
S1/1/1
Non-
MIMO
S2/2/2
Non-
MIMO
S3/3/3
Non-
MIMO
S4/4/4
Non-
MIMO
S1/1/1
MIMO
S2/2/2
MIMO
S3/3/3
MIMO
S4/4/4
MIMO
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 206/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
Cabinet(option
al)
1 1 APM30H
(Ver.B)
: 2
APM30
H
(Ver.D)
: 1
APM30H
(Ver.B)
: 2
APM30
H
(Ver.D)
: 1
APM30H
(Ver.B)
: 2
APM30
H
(Ver.D)
: 1
APM30H
(Ver.B)
: 2
APM30
H
(Ver.D)
: 1
APM30H
(Ver.B)
: 2
APM30
H
(Ver.D)
: 1
APM30H
(Ver.B)
: 2
APM30
H
(Ver.D)
: 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WMPT
/UMPT
a1/
UMPT
b1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WBBP
d
1 1 2 2 1 2 3 4
RRU38
06
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
RRU30
08 (900
MHz)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
RRU30
08
(1800
MHz)
0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3
Multi
Carrier
License(per
Carrier)
0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9
Power
License
(per
20W)
0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 207/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
3900Series
RRU30
08
Transce
iver
(per
TRX)
0 3 6 12 0 3 6 12
Antenn
a
6 6 9 9 6 6 9 9
GL Co-Module
This section describes the typical configurations when the GSM and LTE modes co-exist in the
RF modules of a 3900 series base station.
NOTE
l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.
l The following configurations assume that each GSM carrier provides 20 W transmit power.
Typical Configurations of GL Co-Module Base Stations (with RFUs)
Table 4-96 lists the typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station using RFUs.
Table 4-97 lists the typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station using RFUs.
Table 4-96 Typical configurations of a GL separate-MPT base station (with RFUs)
GSM1800
MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
LTE
1800
MHz
S1/1/1
10
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
10
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
10
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 4x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 4x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
10
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 4x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 4x2
MIMO
BTS39
00
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 208/239
GSM1800MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
BTS3900A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UMPT
a2/
UMPT
b1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
LBBPd
2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MRFU
d 1800
MHz
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
GSM/
LTE
Dual
Mode
license
(per
sector)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
RF
Output
Power
(per 20
W)
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
Carrier
Bandwi
dth - 0
MHz to
5 MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 209/239
GSM1800MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
Carrier Bandwi
dth - 5
MHz to
10
MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwi
dth - 10
MHz to
15
MHz
0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3
Carrier
Bandwi
dth - 15
MHz to
20
MHz
0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3
GSM
multipl
e
transceiver for
the 2nd
TRX of
multim
ode
module
0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3
GSM
multipl
e
transcei
ver for multim
ode
module
0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6
Resour
ce
Block
150 300 150 300 150 300 150 300
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 210/239
GSM1800MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
BBTransm
it
Channe
l
0 0 0 0 6 6 6 6
Antenn
a
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
Table 4-97 Typical configurations of a GL co-MPT base station (with RFUs)
GSM1800MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
LTE
1800
MHz
S1/1/1
10
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
10
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
10
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 4x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 4x2MIMO
S1/1/1
10
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 4x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20
MHz
Bandwi
dth
DL 4x2MIMO
BTS39
00
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UMPT
b1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UBRIb 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 211/239
GSM1800MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
LBBPd2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
MRFU
d 1800
MHz
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
GSM/
LTE
Dual
Mode
license
(per sector)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
RF
Output
Power
(per 20
W)
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
Carrier
Bandwi
dth - 0
MHz to
5 MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwi
dth - 5
MHz to
10
MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwi
dth - 10
MHz to
15
MHz
0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3
Carrier
Bandwi
dth - 15
MHz to
20
MHz
0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 212/239
GSM1800MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
GSMmultipl
e
transcei
ver for
the 2nd
TRX of
multim
ode
module
0 3 3 3 0 3 3 3
GSM
multiple
transcei
ver for
multim
ode
module
0 0 3 6 0 0 3 6
Resour
ce
Block
150 300 150 300 150 300 150 300
BBTransm
it
Channe
l
0 0 0 0 6 6 6 6
MPT
Multi
Mode
license
(LTE)
(Per
UMPT)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Antenn
a
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
Typical configurations of a GL base station using RRUs
The RRU3929 can be configured in the BTS3900C (Ver.C) that uses the GL separate-MPT or
G*L co-MPT mode. The typical configurations in these scenarios are listed in Table 4-98 and
Table 4-99.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 213/239
Table 4-98 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in separate-MPT mode (with the
RRU3929)
GSM 1800MHz
O1 O2 O3 O4
LTE 1800 MHz O1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
O1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
O1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
O1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
OMB (Ver.C)
cabinet
1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1
UMPTa2 1 1 1 1
LBBPd2 1 1 1 1
RRU3929 1 1 1 1
GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license
(per sector)
1 1 1 1
RF Output
Power (per 20
W)
1 1 1 1
Carrier
Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz
1 1 1 1
Carrier
Bandwidth - 5
MHz to 10 MHz
1 1 1 1
Carrier
Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15 MHz
1 1 1 1
Carrier
Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20 MHz
1 1 1 1
GSM multiple
transceiver for
the 2nd TRX of
multimode
module
0 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 214/239
GSM 1800MHz
O1 O2 O3 O4
GSM multiple
transceiver for multimode
module
0 0 1 2
Resource Block 100 100 100 100
BB Transmit
Channel
0 0 0 0
Antenna 1 1 1 1
Table 4-99 Typical configurations of the BTS3900C (Ver.C) in co-MPT mode (with the
RRU3929)
GSM 1800MHz
O1 O2 O3 O4
LTE 1800 MHz O1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
O1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
O1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
O1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
2x2 MIMO
OMB (Ver.C)cabinet 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1
UMPTb1 1 1 1 1
UBRIb 1 1 1 1
LBBPd1 1 1 1 1
RRU3929 1 1 1 1
GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license
(per sector)
1 1 1 1
RF Output
Power (per 20
W)
1 1 1 1
Carrier
Bandwidth - 0
MHz to 5 MHz
1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 215/239
GSM 1800MHz
O1 O2 O3 O4
Carrier
Bandwidth - 5MHz to 10 MHz
1 1 1 1
Carrier
Bandwidth - 10
MHz to 15 MHz
1 1 1 1
Carrier
Bandwidth - 15
MHz to 20 MHz
1 1 1 1
GSM multiple
transceiver for
the 2nd TRX of
multimode
module
0 1 1 1
GSM multiple
transceiver for
multimode
module
0 0 1 2
Resource Block 100 100 100 100
BB Transmit
Channel
0 0 0 0
MPT Multi
Mode license
(LTE)
1 1 1 1
Antenna 1 1 1 1
GL Co-BBUThis section describes the typical configurations when GSM and LTE are deployed on one BBU
of a 3900 series base station.
NOTE
The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.
Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations Using RFUs
The following table lists the typical configurations of a 3900 series macro base station in the GL
co-BBU separate-MPT scenario.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 216/239
Table 4-100 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station using RFUs
GSM 900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
GSM 1800MHz
N/A NA S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
LTE 2600
MHz
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 4x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 4x2
MIMO
BTS3900
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900
A cabinet
1 1 2 2 2 2
BTS3900
L cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS3900
AL cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1
LMPT/
UMPTa2/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1 1 1
LBBPc/
LBBPd1
1 1 1 1 1 3
GRFU 900
MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3
GRFU
1800 MHz
0 0 3 3 3 3
LRFU 3 3 3 3 6 6
RF Output
Power (per
20W)
3 3 3 3 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidt
h -
0~5MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 217/239
GSM 900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
Carrier
Bandwidth -
5~10MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidt
h -
10~15MH
z
0 3 0 3 0 3
Carrier
Bandwidt
h -15~20MH
z
0 3 0 3 0 3
3900
Series
GRFU
Transceiv
er (per
TRX)
0 3 6 12 6 12
Antenna 6 6 9 9 9 9
Typical Configurations of GL Co-BBU Base Stations Using RRUs
The following table lists the typical configurations of a DBS3900 in the GL co-BBU separate-
MPT scenario.
Table 4-101 Typical configurations of a GL co-BBU separate-MPT base station using RRUs
GSM 900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
GSM 1800
MHz
N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S3/3/3 S4/4/4
LTE 2600
MHz
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 4x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidt
h
DL 4x2
MIMO
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 218/239
GSM 900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
Cabinet
(optional)
1 1 APM30H
(Ver.B): 2APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
APM30H
(Ver.B): 2APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
APM30H
(Ver.B): 2APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
APM30H
(Ver.B): 2APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1
GTMU 1 1 1 1 1 1
LMPT/
UMPTa2/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1 1 1
LBBPc/
LBBPd1
1 1 1 1 1 3
RRU3008
900 MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3
RRU3008
1800 MHz
0 0 3 3 3 3
RRU3201 3 3 3 3 6 6
RF Output
Power (per
20W)
3 3 3 3 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidt
h -
0~5MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidt
h -
5~10MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
10~15MH
z
0 3 0 3 0 3
Carrier
Bandwidt
h -
15~20MH
z
0 3 0 3 0 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 219/239
GSM 900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
3900
SeriesRRU3008
Transceiv
er (per
TRX)
0 3 6 12 6 12
Antenna 6 6 9 9 9 9
GUL Triple-ModeThis section describes the typical configurations of a 3900 series base station supporting the
GSM, UMTS, and LTE modes.
NOTE
l In UMTS non-MIMO configurations, each carrier provides output power of 20 W. In UMTS MIMO
configurations, each carrier provides output power of 40 W (2x20 W).
l The following configurations assume that each LTE channel provides 20 W transmit power.
Typical Configurations of GUL Triple-Mode Base Stations Using RFUs
Table 4-102, Table 4-103, and Table 4-104 list the typical configurations of a GUL triple-mode
base station using RFUs.
Table 4-102 Typical configurations of a GUL separate-MPT base station
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
UMTS 900
MHz
S1/1/1 Non-
MIMO
S1/1/1 Non-
MIMO
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4
UMTS 2100
MHz
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S3/3/3 (Non-
MIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900
cabinet
1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 220/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
BTS3900A
cabinet
2 2 2 2
BTS3900L
cabinet
1 1 1 1
BTS3900AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1
BBU 2 2 2 2
GTMU 1 1 1 1
WMPT/
UMPTa1/UMPTb1
1 1 1 1
LMPT/
UMPTa2/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1
LBBPc 1 1 1 1
MRFU 900
MHz
3 3 3 3
GRFU 1800
MHz
0 3 3 3
WRFU 2100
MHz
3 3 3 3
LRFU 2600
MHz
3 3 3 3
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license (per
sector)
3 3 3 3
GSM MultipleTransceiver for
the 2nd TRX of
Multi-Mode
Module
3 3 3 3
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for
Multi-Mode
Module
0 0 0 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 221/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
Multiple
Transceiver (Per TRX)
0 6 9 9
WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for the 1st
Carrier of Multi-
Mode Module
(per Carrier)
3 3 3 3
WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for Multi-ModeModule (per
Carrier)
0 0 3 3
Power License
(per 20W)
3 3 6 9
Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)
3 3 3 6
RF Output
Power (per
20W)
3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
0~5MHz
3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
5~10MHz
3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
10~15MHz
0 0 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
15~20MHz
0 0 3 3
Antenna 9 12 12 12
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 222/239
Table 4-103 Typical configurations of a base station in GU+L(G)/GL+U(G) mode
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2
UMTS 900MHz
S1/1/1 Non-MIMO
S1/1/1 Non-MIMO
S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz S3/3/3 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
UMTS 2100
MHz
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S3/3/3 (Non-
MIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900
cabinet
1 1 1 1
BTS3900A
cabinet
2 2 2 2
BTS3900Lcabinet
1 1 1 1
BTS3900AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1
BBU 2 2 2 2
GTMU 1 1 1 1
UMPTa1/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1
UCIU 1 1 1 1
WBBPf 1 2 2 2
UMPTa2/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1
LBBPd2 2 2 2 2
MRFU 900
MHz
3 3 3 3
MRFU 1800
MHz
3 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 223/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2
WRFU 2100
MHz
3 3 3 3
LRFU 2600
MHz
3 3 3 3
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license (per
sector)
3 3 3 3
GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license
(per sector)
3 3 3 3
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for
the 2nd TRX of
Multi-Mode
Module
6 6 6 6
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for
Multi-Mode
Module
3 3 6 9
WCDMA MultiCarrier License
for the 1st
Carrier of Multi-
Mode Module
(per Carrier)
3 3 3 3
WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)
0 0 3 3
Power License
(per 20W)
3 3 6 9
Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)
3 3 3 6
RF Output
Power (per
20W)
3 3 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 224/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2
Carrier
Bandwidth -0~5MHz
6 6 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth -
5~10MHz
6 6 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth -
10~15MHz
0 0 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth -
15~20MHz
0 0 6 6
Resource Block 300 300 600 600
Antenna 12 12 12 12
Table 4-104 Typical configurations of a base station in G*U*L mode
GSM 900
MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
UMTS 900
MHz
S1/1/1 Non-
MIMO
S1/1/1 Non-
MIMO
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz S3/3/3 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
UMTS 2100MHz
S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO)
S3/3/3 (Non-MIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900
cabinet
1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 225/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
BTS3900A
cabinet
2 2 2 2
BTS3900L
cabinet
1 1 1 1
BTS3900AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1
UMPTb1 1 1 1 1
UBRIb 2 2 2 2
WBBPf 1 2 2 3
LBBPd2 2 2 2 2
MRFU 900
MHz
3 3 3 3
MRFU 1800
MHz
3 3 3 3
WRFU 2100
MHz
3 3 3 3
LRFU 2600MHz
3 3 3 3
GSM/UMTS
Dual Mode
license (per
sector)
3 3 3 3
GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license
(per sector)
3 3 3 3
GSM MultipleTransceiver for
the 2nd TRX of
Multi-Mode
Module
6 6 6 6
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for
Multi-Mode
Module
3 3 6 9
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 226/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
WCDMA Multi
Carrier Licensefor the 1st
Carrier of Multi-
Mode Module
(per Carrier)
3 3 3 3
WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)
0 0 3 3
Power License(per 20W) 3 3 6 9
Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)
3 3 3 6
RF Output
Power (per
20W)
3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
0~5MHz
6 6 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth -
5~10MHz
6 6 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth -
10~15MHz
0 0 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth -
15~20MHz
0 0 6 6
Resource Block 300 300 600 600
MPT Multi
Mode license
(UMTS)(per
UMPT)
1 1 1 1
MPT Multi
Mode license
(LTE)(per
UMPT)
1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 227/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
Antenna 12 12 12 12
Typical Configurations of GUL Triple-Mode Base Stations Using RRUs
Table 4-105 lists the typical configurations of a base station working in GU+L(G) mode and
using RRUs. Table 4-106 lists the typical configurations of a base station working in G*U*L
mode.
Table 4-105 Typical configurations of a base station in GU+L(G) mode using RRUs
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
UMTS 900
MHz
S1/1/1 Non-
MIMO
S1/1/1 Non-
MIMO
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4
UMTS 2100
MHz
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S3/3/3 (Non-
MIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
Cabinet
(optional)
APM30H
(Ver.C): 2
APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
APM30H
(Ver.C): 2
APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
APM30H
(Ver.C): 2
APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
APM30H
(Ver.C): 2
APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
BBU 2 2 2 2
GTMU 1 1 1 1
WMPT/
UMPTa1/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1
WBBPd/
WBBPf
1 2 2 3
UMPTa2/
UMPTb1
1 1 1 1
LBBPc/
LBBPd1
1 1 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 228/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
UCIU 1 1 1 1
RRU3908 900
MHz
3 3 3 3
RRU3929 1800
MHz
0 3 3 3
WRRU 2100
MHz
3 3 3 3
LRRU 2600
MHz
3 3 3 3
GSM/UMTSDual Mode
license (per
sector)
3 3 3 3
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for
the 2nd TRX of
Multi-Mode
Module
3 3 3 3
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for
Multi-Mode
Module
0 0 0 3
Multiple
Transceiver (Per
TRX)
0 6 9 9
WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for the 1st
Carrier of Multi-
Mode Module
(per Carrier)
3 3 3 3
WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)
0 0 3 3
Power License
(per 20W)
3 3 6 9
Multi Carrier
License
3 3 3 6
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 229/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
RF Output
Power (per 20W)
3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
0~5MHz
3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
5~10MHz
3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
10~15MHz
0 0 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
15~20MHz
0 0 3 3
Antenna 9 12 12 12
Table 4-106 Typical configurations of a base station in G*U*L mode
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
UMTS 900
MHz
S1/1/1 Non-
MIMO
S1/1/1 Non-
MIMO
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz S3/3/3 S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4
LTE 1800 MHz S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
UMTS 2100
MHz
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S2/2/2 (Non-
MIMO)
S3/3/3 (Non-
MIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
10 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz
Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 230/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
Cabinet
(optional)
l APM30H
(Ver.C): 2l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
l APM30H
(Ver.C): 2l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
l APM30H
(Ver.C): 2l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
l APM30H
(Ver.C): 2l APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
BBU 1 1 1 1
UMPTb1 1 1 1 1
UBRIb 2 2 2 2
WBBPf 1 2 2 3
LBBPd2 2 2 2 2
RRU3929 900
MHz
3 3 3 3
RRU3929 1800
MHz
3 3 3 3
RRU3829 2100
MHz
3 3 3 3
RRU3201 2600
MHz
3 3 3 3
GSM/UMTSDual Mode
license (per
sector)
3 3 3 3
GSM/LTE Dual
Mode license
(per sector)
3 3 3 3
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for
the 2nd TRX of
Multi-ModeModule
6 6 6 6
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for
Multi-Mode
Module
3 3 6 9
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 231/239
GSM 900MHz
S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
WCDMA Multi
Carrier Licensefor the 1st
Carrier of Multi-
Mode Module
(per Carrier)
3 3 3 3
WCDMA Multi
Carrier License
for Multi-Mode
Module (per
Carrier)
0 0 3 3
Power License(per 20W) 3 3 6 9
Multi Carrier
License (per
Carrier)
3 3 3 6
RF Output
Power (per
20W)
3 3 3 3
Carrier
Bandwidth -
0~5MHz
6 6 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth -
5~10MHz
6 6 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth -
10~15MHz
0 0 6 6
Carrier
Bandwidth -
15~20MHz
0 0 6 6
Resource Block 300 300 600 600
MPT Multi
Mode license
(LTE)
1 1 1 1
MPT Multi
Mode license
(UMTS)
1 1 1 1
Antenna 12 12 12 12
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 232/239
Typical Configurations of GUL Triple-Mode Base Stations Using RFUs and RRUsThe following table lists the typical configurations of a GUL triple-mode base station using
RFUs and RRUs.
Table 4-107 Typical configurations of a GUL triple-mode base station using RFUs and RRUs
LTE 800 MHz S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
N/A S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
GSM 900 MHz S2/2/2 S2/2/2 S3/3/3
UMTS 900 MHz S1/1/1 Non-MIMO S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO) S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO)
GSM 1800 MHz S3/3/3 S4/4/4 S4/4/4
UMTS 2100 MHz S2/2/2 (Non-MIMO) S2/2/2 (MIMO) S3/3/3 (MIMO)
LTE 2600 MHz S1/1/1
10 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHz Bandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
BTS3900 cabinet 1 1 1
BTS3900A cabinet 2 2 2
BTS3900L cabinet 1 1 1
BTS3900AL cabinet 1 1 1
BBU 2 2 2
GTMU 1 1 1
WMPT/UMPTa1/
UMPTb1
1 1 1
WBBPd 2 3 4
LMPT/UMPTa2/
UMPTb1
1 1 1
LBBPc 2 1 2
MRFU 900 MHz 3 3 3
GRFU 1800 MHz 3 3 3
WRFU 2100M 3 6 6
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 233/239
LTE 800 MHz S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
N/A S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMOLRFU 2600 MHz 3 0 0
RRU 2600 MHz 0 3 3
RRU 800 MHz 3 0 3
GSM/UMTS Dual
Mode license (per
sector)
3 3 3
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for the
2nd TRX of Multi-
Mode Module
3 3 3
GSM Multiple
Transceiver for
Multi-Mode Module
0 0 3
3900 Series GRFU
Transceiver (per
TRX)
6 9 9
WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for the 1st Carrier of
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)
3 3 3
WCDMA Multi
Carrier License for
Multi-Mode Module
(per Carrier)
0 3 3
Power License (per
20W)
3 6 15
Multi Carrier
License (per Carrier)
3 3 6
RF Output Power
(per 20W)
6 3 6
Carrier Bandwidth -
0~5MHz
6 3 6
Carrier Bandwidth -
5~10MHz
6 3 6
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 234/239
LTE 800 MHz S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMO
N/A S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2 MIMOCarrier Bandwidth -
10~15MHz
3 3 6
Carrier Bandwidth -
15~20MHz
3 3 6
Antenna 12 12 12
GU Co-BBP
This section describes the typical configurations of 3900 series base stations in GU co-BBP
mode.
The following table lists the typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and co-
BBP and configured with WRFUs of 80 W.
Table 4-108 Typical configurations of a base station using GU co-MPT and co-BBP and
configured with WRFUs of 80 W
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
GSM
900
MHz
N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4 N/A N/A S3/3/3 S4/4/4
WCD
MA
2100
MHz
S1/1/1
Non-
MIMO
S2/2/2
Non-
MIMO
S3/3/3
Non-
MIMO
S4/4/4
Non-
MIMO
S1/1/1
MIMO
S2/2/2
MIMO
S3/3/3
MIMO
S4/4/4
MIMO
BTS3900L
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BTS39
00A
cabinet
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
BTS39
00
cabinet
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 235/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
BTS3900AL
cabinet
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UMPT
b1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UBBP
d1
1 1 1 1- 1 1 1 1-
UBBP
d2
- - - 1 - - - 1
WRFU
of 80 W
3 3 3 3 6 6 6 6
MRFU
900
MHz
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
MRFU
1800
MHz
0 0 3 3 0 0 3 3
Multi-
Carrier
Licens
e
(per
Carrier
)
0 3 6 9 0 3 6 9
RF
Output
Power
(per 20
W)
0 3 6 9 0 6 12 18
3900
series
GRFU
transce
iver
(per
TRX)
0 3 6 12 0 3 6 12
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 236/239
GSM900MHz
S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2 S1/1/1 S2/2/2
UBBPFirst-
Mode
license
(GSM)
(per
UBBP)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UBBP
Multi-
Mode
license
(UMTS (per
UBBP)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Antenn
a
6 6 9 9 6 6 9 9
Typical Configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P Scenarios
This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios.
The following table describes the typical configurations of an AAU3910 that is in 2T4R mode
and supports 2x40 W output power in 2.6 A+1.8 P/2.1 P scenarios.
Table 4-109 Typical configurations in 2.6A+1.8P/2.1P scenarios (2T4R 2x40 W)
LTEConfiguration
S1/1/1
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2
MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2
MIMO
S2/2/2
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2
MIMO
S2/2/2
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2
MIMOCabinet (optional) APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
APM30H
(Ver.D): 1
BBU 1 1 1 1
UMPTa2 1 1 1 1
Baseba
nd
board
LBBPd
1
1 1 - -
LBBPd
2
- - 1 1
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 237/239
LTEConfiguration
S1/1/1
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S1/1/1
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S2/2/2
10 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
S2/2/2
20 MHzBandwidth
DL 2x2MIMO
AAU3910 2.6 A
+1.8 P/2.1 P
3 3 3 3
RF Output Power
(per 20 W)
3 3 6 6
Carrier Bandwidth
- 0 MHz to 5 MHz
3 3 3 3
Carrier Bandwidth
- 5 MHz to 10MHz
3 3 3 3
Carrier Bandwidth
- 10 MHz to 15
MHz
0 3 0 3
Carrier Bandwidth
- 15 MHz to 20
MHz
0 3 0 3
Resource block
(required for the
LBBPd2)
0 0 150 300
BB transmit
channel (required
for the LBBPd2)
0 0 6 6
Antenna 0 0 0 0
Typical Configurations of an AAU3902 in 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to 2690) PScenarios
This section describes the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P
+(1710 to 2690) P scenario.
The following table lists the typical configurations of an AAU3902 in the 2100 A+(790 to 960)
P+(1710 to 2690) P scenario.
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 238/239
Table 4-110 Typical configurations of an AAU3902 in the 2100 A+(790 to 960) P+(1710 to
2690) P scenario
UMTS
Configuration
S1/1/1
Non-MIMO
20 W/ C
S2/2/2
Non-MIMO
20 W/ C
S4/4/4
Non-MIMO
20 W/ C
S2/2/2
MIMO
2x20 W/C
S4/4/4
MIMO
2x10 W/C
S2/2/2
2T4R2x20 W/C
S4/4/4
2T4R2x10 W/C
S2/2/2 /2/2/2
2T4R
2x10 W/C
S4/4/4 /4/4/4
2T4R
2x5 W/C
BBU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UMP
Tb1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
WBB
Pf4
1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 4
AAU3
902
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Multi
Carrie
r
Licens
e
(per
Carrie
r)
0 3 9 3 9 3 9 9 21
Power
Licens
e
(per
20W)
0 3 9 6 9 6 9 9 21
AAS
Virtua
l Four
Uplin
k Chann
els
(per
RU)
0 0 0 0 0 3 3 0 0
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference
Issue 06 (2014-03-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
7/18/2019 3900 Series Base Station Configuration Principles (Global)(06)(PDF)-En
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/3900-series-base-station-configuration-principles-global06pdf-en 239/239
UMTSConfigurati
on
S1/1/1
Non-MIMO
20 W/ C
S2/2/2
Non-MIMO
20 W/ C
S4/4/4
Non-MIMO
20 W/ C
S2/2/2
MIMO
2x20 W/C
S4/4/4
MIMO
2x10 W/C
S2/2/2
2T4R
2x20
W/C
S4/4/4
2T4R
2x10
W/C
S2/2/2 /2/2/2
2T4R
2x10 W/C
S4/4/4 /4/4/4
2T4R
2x5 W/C
AAS
Vertic
al
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3
3900 Series Base Station
Configuration Principles (Global) 4 Version Difference